Top Banner
Answer Test Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 80 63 No No A. 10 B. 20 C. 30 GA 14 No No A. 10 B. 20 C. 30 80 60 No No A. EUR 1,045 B. EUR 1,026 C. EUR 1,055 GA 11 No No A. EUR 1,045 B. EUR 1,026 C. EUR 1,055 115 6 No No Procurement type Valuation area Company Code 80 34 No No A. Plant B. Vendor subrange C. Partner schema 115 9 No Yes 80 65 No No GA 16 No No 115 55 No No A release strategy for purchase requisition is defined as follows: -Account Assignment Category " " (blank) -Plant 1000 or 1100 -Purchasing Group 001 =- Item value. > 1000 For which purchase requisition item (see graphic) will this strategy A release strategy for purchase requisition is defined as follows: Account Assignment Category " " (blank) -Plant 1000 or 1100 -Purchasing Group 001 =- Item value. > 1000 For which purchase requisition item (see graphic) will this strategy A vendor offers you a material at the gross price of EUR 1,000. In addition, the vendor gives you a 10% discount and a 5% cash discount. The vendor charges EUR 200 for freight costs. What is the effective price if you use the calculation schema A vendor offers you a material at the gross price of EUR 1,000. In addition, the vendor gives you a 10% discount and a 5% cash discount. The vendor charges EUR 200 for freight costs. What is the effective price if you use the calculation schema At what level can you set quantity and value updating on material type At what level in the vendor master record is it possible to define purchasing data that is different from that which is maintained at the purchasing organization level? (Choose two.) Before deliveries arrive from certain vendors, you want to be informed of the delivery date and quantity. Which of the following settings can you define in a confirmation control key? Confirmations must be transmitted electronically The goods receip can be posted no earlier than the confirmed delivery date The full confirmed quantity must be entered in one posting in the system Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries? (Choose two.) A. When creating info records B. When creating contracts C. Using the Mass Maintenance Tool Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries? (Choose two.) A. When creating info records B. When creating contracts C. Using the Mass Maintenance Tool During the physical inventory, the warehouse manager has decided to have a quantity of a material recounted for a physical inventory document. How is a recounted processed in the system? A new physical inventory document is created with reference to a original document. The new counted quantity is entered in the new physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted The new count quantity is entered in the existing physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted inventory document is created. The new count quantity is entered. When the inventory difference is now posted, all physical inventory documents still to be posted for the material affected
338

Material de Referencia MM

Jan 02, 2016

Download

Documents

Craig Green
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

80 63 No No

A. 10 B. 20 C. 30 D. 40

GA 14 No No

A. 10 B. 20 C. 30 D. 40

80 60 No No

A. EUR 1,045 B. EUR 1,026 C. EUR 1,055 D. EUR 1,050

GA 11 No No

A. EUR 1,045 B. EUR 1,026 C. EUR 1,055 D. EUR 1,050

115 6 No No Procurement type Valuation area Company Code Plant

80 34 No No

A. Plant C. Partner schema D. Partner role

115 9 No Yes

80 65 No No

GA 16 No No

115 55 No No

A release strategy for purchase requisition is defined as follows: -Account Assignment Category " " (blank) -Plant 1000 or 1100 -Purchasing Group 001 =- Item value. > 1000 For which purchase requisition item (see graphic) will this strategy be determined?

A release strategy for purchase requisition is defined as follows: Account Assignment Category " " (blank) -Plant 1000 or 1100 -Purchasing Group 001 =- Item value. > 1000 For which purchase requisition item (see graphic) will this strategy be determined?

A vendor offers you a material at the gross price of EUR 1,000. In addition, the vendor gives you a 10% discount and a 5% cash discount. The vendor charges EUR 200 for freight costs. What is the effective price if you use the calculation schema below?

A vendor offers you a material at the gross price of EUR 1,000. In addition, the vendor gives you a 10% discount and a 5% cash discount. The vendor charges EUR 200 for freight costs. What is the effective price if you use the calculation schema below?

At what level can you set quantity and value updating on material typeAt what level in the vendor master record is it possible to define purchasing data that is different from that which is maintained at the purchasing organization level? (Choose two.)

B. Vendor subrange

Before deliveries arrive from certain vendors, you want to be informed of the delivery date and quantity. Which of the following settings can you define in a confirmation control key?

Confirmations must be transmitted electronically

The goods receip can be posted no earlier than the confirmed delivery date

The full confirmed quantity must be entered in one posting in the system

Only the confirmed quantity can be posted when the goods are received

Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries? (Choose two.)

A. When creating info records

B. When creating contracts

C. Using the Mass Maintenance Tool

D. When creating a purchase order

Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries? (Choose two.)

A. When creating info records

B. When creating contracts

C. Using the Mass Maintenance Tool

D. When creating a purchase order

During the physical inventory, the warehouse manager has decided to have a quantity of a material recounted for a physical inventory document. How is a recounted processed in the system?

A new physical inventory document is created with reference to a original document. The new counted quantity is entered in the new physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted

The new count quantity is entered in the existing physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted

A new physical inventory document is created. The new count quantity is entered. When the inventory difference is now posted, all physical inventory documents still to be posted for the material affected are deleted

A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. After the recount, the inventory difference for the old document is posted first, followed by the inventory difference for the new document

Page 2: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

80 8 No No

115 7 No No

80 44 No No

115 27 No No Cost Center Work Center Production Order Profit Center

115 86 No No Create reservation

80 67 No No

115 47 No No Company Code Plant Client

115 13 No No

80 9 No No

115 89 No No How can block purchase requisition be released?

115 34 No No

115 102 No No one any number three two

GA 30 No No

A. Two B. Three C. One D. Any number

For a material without a material master record, a source of supply is to be found when a purchase requisition is created. You request 10 pallets of copier paper belonging to material group 4711. Which of the following sources of supply is proposed by the system?

A. Value contract with item category W (material group) for articles of material group 4711

B. Value contract for material 4711

C. SRM central contract with item category M (material unknown) for 100 tons of copier paper of material group 4711

D. Quantity contract for over 500 pallets of copier paper for a stock material that belongs to material group 4711

For a material without material master record, a source of supply is to be found when a purchase requisition is created. Which of the following source of supply is proposed by the system

Quantity contract for over 500 pallets of copier paper for stock material that belongs to material group 4711

Value contract for material 4711

Value contract with item category W (material group) for aticles of material group 4711

SRM Central contract with item category M (Material unknown) for 100 ton of copier paper of material group 4711

For posting inventory differences, you can define tolerance groups. What tolerances can you define? (Choose two.)

A. Maximum difference amount for each Physical Inventory document

B. Maximum difference amount for each Physical Inventory document item

C. Maximum percentage value variance for each Physical Inventory document item

D. Maximum difference amount for each storage location

E. Maximum quantity variance for each Physical Inventory document item

For which of the following objects can you post a good issue directly from the valuated stock using a standard movement type

Project (WBS element)

For which of the following transaction can the source of supply be determinated automatically?

Automatic purchase order generation for good receipt

Create pruchase order, vendor unknown

Create purchase order, venrdor know

Create purchase requisition

For which of the following transactions can the source of supply be determined automatically? (Choose two.)

A. Create reservation B. Create purchase order, vendor known

C. Create purchase order, vendor unknown

D. Create purchase requisition

E. Automatic purchase order generation for goods receipt

For Which organizational levels can you maintain the material status in material master record

Purchase organization

For which transfer posting can an account document be generated if the postings are made with a valuated material

Transfer posting from unrestricted use stock to quality inspection stock

Transfer posting between plants that have the same company code

Transfer posting between storage location of one plant on a two step procedure

Transfer posting from GR block stock to unrestricted use stock

From which stock type can goods issues to cost centers be posted?

A. Non-valuated blocked stock

B. Valuated blocked stock

C. Quality inspection stock

D. Unrestricted-use stock

Manually, using the collective release

Manually, using the individual release

Automatically, when purchase requistion are converted into a purchase order

Manually, using the change purchase requisition transaction

In Logistics Invoice Verification form where does the system determine the terms of payment for invoices with out PO

From the purchasing data in the vendor master record

From the fist entry in the customizing table for term of payment

From the last invoice form the vendor

From the accounting data in the vendor master record

In the feature, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51NIn the future, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. To do this, they are to access catalogs directly from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N?

Page 3: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

80 57 No Yes

115 73 No No

115 36 No Yes

115 28 No No

115 43 No No

80 74 No NoC. SAP Help D. Troubleshooting

115 99 No No Troubleshooting SAP HELP

115 63 No No

80 56 No No

80 70 No No

In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the "My documents" overview. Which documents are displayed under "Purchase Orders"?

A. The purchase orders that you recently created

B. The purchase orders found by the system in the last document search

C. The purchase orders for which you last posted goods receipts

D. The purchase orders with today's date as the delivery date

In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the my documents overview. Which documents are displayed under Purchase Orders

The purchase order found by the system in the last document search

The purchase orders that you recently created

The purchase orders with today´s date as the delivery date

The purchase orders for which you last posted goods receipts

In which of the following cases can invoices be released automatically

Invoices that were blocked due to a quantity variance, provided that the entire invoiced quantity has in the meantime been posted as a goods receipt

Invoices that were blocked due to a quantity variance provided that the delivery date has in the meantime been reached

Stochasticaly blocked invoices

Invoices that were blocked due to a price variance provided that the PO price now matches the invoice price

Manually blocked invoices

In which of the following cases is the good receipt always posted as non- valuated

Good receipt to the stock of material provided to vendor

Good receipt for initial stock entry

Goods receipt to the consignment stock

Goods receipt for a free-of-charge delivery

In which of the following cases you have to maintain GR/IR clearing account in Logistics Inovice Verification

You posted an invoice incorrectly and canceled it afterwards

The vendor invoiced a price lower that a procure order price

For an item that has been delivered, a higher quantity was invoiced than delivered

The vendor has invoiced a price higher than the purchase order price

SAP Solution Manager contains the Service Desk function. What functions does the Service Desk provide? (Choose two.)

A. Process for message processing

B. Management of SAP Notes

SAP Solution Manager contains the service desk funtion. What funtion does the service desk provide?

Management of SAP notes

Process for menssage processing

What advantage does the collective number have in request for quatations?

The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating source list entries

The collective number makes it easier to select quotation documents for the price comparison

The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating info records

The collective number makes it easier to select documents for message output of request for quotation

What advantage does the collective number have in requests for quotations?

A. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for message output of requests for quotations.

B. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating info records from quotations.

C. The collective number makes it easier to select quotation documents for the price comparison.

D. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating source list entries from quotations.

What are characteristics of material valuation at the moving average price? (Choose two.)

A. Price difference postings can happen when posting an invoice receipt

B. Goods receipts are always valuated based on the moving average price from the material master record

C. The moving average price is equal to the total value multiplied by total quantity of stock

D. If a purchase requisition is created, the current moving average price is proposed as the valuation price

Page 4: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

115 107 No No

115 51 No No What can an MRP area include? One subcontractor One plant Multiple plants

115 30 No No Quantity at item level Text at the item level

115 11 No Yes What can be triggered by a good receipt posting? Label are printed

115 72 No Yes

115 29 No Yes What can you defined in a movement type in Customizing

80 59 No No

115 64 No Yes Processing status Creation indicator MEP Controller Requester

115 77 No Yes What characterizes an item category in purchasing

80 53 No Yes

115 53 No Yes What data is display in the list of inventory differences? Quantity count Difference quantity Book quantity Current plan stock

what are characteristitics of material valuation at the moving averange price?

The moving averange price is equal to the total value multipled by total quantity of stock

If a purchase requisition is created, the current average price is proposed as the valuated price

Price difference posting can happen when posting an invoice receipt

Goods receipts are always valuated based on the moving average price from the material master record

Multiple subcontractor

Multiple Storage Locations

What can be changed in a material document after it has been posted

Vendor delivery note number in the document header

Stock type at item level

For stock material, the total quantity and total value are recalculated in the material master record

The MRP controller receives a message about over deliveries

The buyer receives a message about the good received

The requisitioner of a refereced purchased requisition receives a message about the good received

What can you defined from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (enter invoice)

Whether the goods receipt for a purchase order item was posted as valuated or non-valuated

Total of open item for a vendor in the current invoice

Whether there is a different invoicing party in the purchase order for this invoice

Whether there were return deliveries for a purchase order item

Whether block invoices exist for a purchase order item

The reversal movement type for a movement type

The quantity and value updates for posting with a movement type

The number range for a material document that is generated when a posting are made

Transaction in which movement time can be used

What can you derive from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (Enter Invoice)? (Choose two.)

A. Whether blocked invoices exist for a purchase order item

B. Whether the goods receipt for a purchase order item was posted as valuated or non-valuated

C. The total of open items for a vendor in the current invoice

D. Whether there were return deliveries for a purchase order item

E. Whether there is a different invoicing party in the purchase order for this invoice

What can you use to determine the origin of a purchase requisition?

New item category can be created in customizing

The name of an item category can be changed in customizing

The item category contains a default value for the invoice receipt indicator in a purchase order items

Any item category can be used in combination with an account assignment category in a purchase order

What characterizes an item category in purchasing? (Choose two.)

A. New item categories can be created in Customizing.

B. The item category contains a default value for the invoice receipt indicator in a purchase order item.

C. Any item category can be used in combination with any account assignment category in a purchase order.

D. The name of an item category can be changed in Customizing.

Date on which the difference is to be posted

Page 5: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

115 2 No No

A 124

No No

115 32 No No

80 78 No No

115 104 No No what features do the subcontracting order have?

115 40 No No

115 83 No No

80 64 No No

80 75 No No

What is "SAP ERP"?

115 12 No No

What does an account group determine when vendor master records are created?

The number range in which a vendor master record must be created for this account group

The field selection when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

The sequence of tabe pages when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

The default settings of the info update indicator in purchase orders for vendors in this account group

The interval of the number assignment (internal or external)

What does the document type control when you enter an invoice ?

Wheter the invoice is posted as gross or net

Wheter the document type can be used for credit memos

Wheter the invoice is blocked for payment when mposted

The number assignment (number range interval) for the accounting document.

What does the documet type control when an invoice is entered?

Whether the invoice is blocked for payment when posted

The number assignment (number range interval) for the invoice document

The number assignment (number range interval) for the accounting document

Whether the invoice is posted as gross or net

What features do subcontracting orders (item category L) have? (Choose two.)

A. The goods receipt for a subcontracting order must always be posted as valuated.

B. At least one component must be provided to the subcontractor.

C. Subcontracting orders may not have an account assignment.

D. The price in the purchase order contains both the service provided by the subcontractor and the value of the components.

E. For subcontracting orders, an invoice receipt is binding.

For subcontracting order an invoice receipt is binding

At leas one component must be provided to the subcontractor

Subcontracting orders may not have a and account assigment

the goods receipt for subcontracting order must always be posted as valuated

The price in the purcharse orders contain the service provided by the supplier

What happens when you cancel invoices in logistics invoice verification?

The system generates a credit memo

The system deletes the original invoice document

The system generates a subsequent debit

GL/Accounts will be newly determined

What information can you specify in a quota arrangement?

Outline agreement number external procurement requirements

Vendor for external procurements requirements

Info record number for external procurement requirements

Plant from which material is procured for stock transfer requirements

What information can you specify in a quota arrangement? (Choose two.)

A. Plant from which material is procured for stock transfer requirements

B. Outline agreement number for external procurement requirements

C. Vendor for external procurement requirements

D. Info record number for external procurement requirements

A. SAP ERP is an application that a company can use to manage its business processes efficiently.

B. SAP ERP is a system that contains components for purchasing, sales, materials management, production, and so on.

C. SAP ERP is a planning system in which enhanced planning processes can be represented.

D. SAP ERP is a technology platform that can be used as a basis for implementing customer-specific enhancements.

What is mandatory in a purchase order for a non-valuated material?

Set the indicator for non-valuated good receipt

Set the indicator for good receipt

Set the indicator for the invoice receipt

Select an account assignment category and assign and account assignment object

Page 6: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

115 98 No No What is SAP ERP

115 101 No No

80 77 No No

115 67 No No

80 55 No No B. In contracts

115 60 No No Contracts Purchase order info record

80 62 No NoWhere can you maintain the regular vendor?

115 82 No No Where can you mantain the regular vendor?

115 45 No No

115 1 No No

A 116

No No

Which attributes do invoicing plans have ?

115 106 No No Which attributes do invoicing plans have?

SAP ERP is a planing system in which enhanced planning processes can be represented

SAP ERP is a Technology platform that can be used as a basis for implementing customer specific enhacements

SAP ERP is a system that contains components for purchasing, sales, materials, management production an so on

SAP ERP is aplication that company can use to manage its business processes efficiently

What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparation with standart purchase order

invoice for a blanket purchase order are always blocked by the system

Blanket Purchase order item can have multiple account assigment

Blanket purchase order allows non-valuated good receipts only

Blanquet purchase orders items require an account assigment to be entered

What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparison to a standard purchase order (standard item category)?

A. Blanket purchase orders allow non-valuated goods receipts only.

B. Blanket purchase order items require an account assignment to be entered.

C. Blanket purchase orders items can have multiple account assignment.

D. Invoices for blanket purchase orders are always blocked by the system.

What special features apply to purchase orders of services (item category D)

The price can be determinated from the service conditions

When the service sheet is created only services contained in the purchase order can be display

All the services line must have the same account assignment

Unknow account assigment is allowed

Where are only time-independent conditions defined for the procurement process?

A. In purchasing info records

C. In purchase orders

D. In scheduling agreements

Where are only time-independet condition defined for the procurement process

Scheduling agreement

A. In the source list at plant level

B. In the info record at client level

C. In the quota arrangement

D. In the info record at purchasing organization level

In the source list at plant level

In the quota arragement

In the info record at purchasing organization level

In the info record at client level

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object plant?

A Plant can be assigned to a exactly one company code

A Plant can be assigned directly to one controlling area

A plant can be assigned to a reference purchasing organization

A plant can be assigned to several company codes

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object purchase organization?

Purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple controlling areas

Multiple Purchasing group can be assigned to a purchasing organization

Purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple company codes

Purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple plants

Purchasing organization can be assigned to storage locations

invoicing plan can be used for stock material as well as for consumable materials

invoices for invoicing plans can be generated automatically

the invoicing plan type for a purcharse order item can be changed retroactively

the start date of invoicing plans can be definied at item level

Invoice can be generated automatically

Invoicing Plans can be used for stock materials as well as for consumable material

The invoicing plan type for a purcharse order item can be changed retroactively

The start date of an invoicing plan can be defined at item level

Page 7: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

80 80 No No

Which attributes do invoicing plans have? (Choose two.)

115 44 No No Term of payment Invoice date Posting date Reference

115 5 No No Required entry field Display Optional Supress

115 14 No Yes Warehouse stock Reorder point On-order stock

115 91 No Yes

80 73 No Yes

80 76 No No

80 52 No No B. Contracts C. Invoicing plans

115 69 No No Invoicing plan Contracts Delivery Schedules

115 50 No No production orders purchase requisition Scheduling lines Purchase Order Planned Orders

GA 23 No No B. Credit/Debit D. Posting key

115 109 No No General modification Posting Key Credit / Debit Valuation Modification

115 75 No No

A. Invoices for invoicing plans can be generated automatically.

B. The start date of an invoicing plan can be defined at item level.

C. Invoicing plans can be used for stock materials as well as for consumable materials.

D. The invoicing plan type for a purchase order item can be changed retroactively.

Which field can you include in the check for duplicate invoices in customizing for logistic invoice verificationWhich fields attribute is given highest priority in the field selection controlWhich of the following elements belong to warehouse stock available for MRP in net requirement

Non-valuated goods receipt block stock

Fixed purchase requisition

Which of the following statements about SAP solution Manager is correct

Solution Manger is installed as component of each of your existing landscape

solution Manager is add-on industry solution

Solution manager is used only for implementing you aplication

Which of the following statements about SAP Solution Manager is correct?

A. SAP Solution Manager is a standalone system that communicates with the systems in the system landscape.

B. SAP Solution Manager is installed as a component of each of your existing landscapes.

C. SAP Solution Manager is used only for implementing your application.

D. SAP Solution Manager is an add-on industry solution.

Which of the following statements applies to the Enterprise Portal?

A. The portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different systems.

B. The portal is an interface for managing variants of frequently-used transactions.

C. The portal is only a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data.

D. The portal buffers all data so that work can continue in the portal if one of the assigned systems fails.

Which procurement element can be created in Purchasing with automatic purchase order generation?

A. Delivery schedules D. Contract release orders

Which procurement elements can be created in purchasing with automatic purchase order generation

Contracts release order

Which procurement elements can be generated in the material requirement planning run for a material that is externally procuredWhich rule can be selected in account determination for Inventory postings (Transaction BSX)?

A. General modification

C. Valuation modification

Which rules you can be selected in account determination for Inventory posting

Which settings can be made for account assigment categories?

New account assigment category can be created in customizing

The field selection for the account assignment fields of a purchase order can be defined base on the account assignment category

The field selection for all fields of the purchase order header can be defined base on the account assignment category

The field selection for all fields of a purchase order item can bedefined base on the account assignment category

Page 8: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

80 54 No No

115 54 No No Material status Delete status Adjustment status Count status

80 39 No No

115 41 No No

115 115 No No any valuation classes

80 71 No No

115 31 No No A service entry sheet A material document

115 46 No No Basic data Purchasing Forecast Accounting

115 79 No No

80 66 No No

Which settings can be made for account assignment categories? (Choose two.)

A. The field selection for all fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category.

B. The field selection for the account assignment fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category.

C. The field selection for all fields of the purchase order header can be defined based on the account assignment category.

D. New account assignment categories can be created in Customizing.

Which statuses are updated at header level in a physical inventory document

Physical inventory status

Which times belong to the replenishment lead time in the planning run for an externally procured material? (Choose three.)

A. Purchasing processing time

B. Planned delivery time

C. Requirement lead time

D. Goods receipt processing time

E. Minimum remaining shelf life

Which two options can you define in customizing for logistics invoice verification to manage unplanned delivery cost

The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to specific cost center

The unplanned delivery costs are to be split across the invoice items

The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a separate G/L account for unplanned delivery costs

The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a price difference account

Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials

All valuaion classes of the calculation grouping code of the used valuation area

The default valuation class from the user parameters

All valuation classes from the account category reference assigned to the material type

Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials?

A. All valuation classes from the account category reference assigned to the material type.

B. Any valuation class.

C. All valuation classes of the valuation grouping code of the used valuation area.

D. The default valuation class from the user parameters.

With reference to which of the following objects can you enter an invoice in Logistic Invoice Verification

A vendor delivery note

A difference invoice from the vendor

You can use profile to help you enter data in material master record. For which user departments are profile available

Material Requierement Planning Run

You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that apply the info record. What happens when the price is chaged in the info record

The moving average price of the material is recalculated

The PO price in the purchase orders that are still open is automatically changed to the new price

Invoice verification automatically receives a message about he price change made

The new price is inmediately proposed for all new purchase orders created for the relevant material with the respective vendor

You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that are open for delivery from the relevant vendor. What happens when the price is changed in the info record?

A. The moving average price of the material is recalculated.

B. The new price is immediately proposed for all new purchase orders created for the relevant material with the respective vendor.

C. The PO price in the purchase orders that are still open is automatically changed to the new price.

D. Invoice verification automatically receives a message about the price change made.

Page 9: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

115 58 No Yes

80 51 No Yes

115 71 No Yes

80 58 No Yes

80 46 No No

A 129 No No Plant Vendor Subrange Partner role Partner Schema

115 52 No No Exception message MRP type MRP Controller Procurement type

115 108 No No Consumption account Price difference accouGR/IR Clearing accounstock account

80 69 No No

C. Stock account

You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?

In the language of the purchase order header

In the language in which you are logged on to the system

In the language defined in the output determination customizing settings

In the language defined in the vendor master record

You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?

A. In the language in which you are logged on to the system

B. In the language defined in the vendor master record

C. In the language of the purchase order header

D. In the language defined in the output determination Customizing settings

You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are already selected when you call the purchse order. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system?

Purchase order item with account assignment, for which a goods receipt is not planned

Purchase order item for which a goods receipt was posted to non-valuated GR blocked stock

Purchase order item of the category limit

Valuated good receipt for a purchase order item with a purchase order quantity of 100 pc

You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are selected while others are not. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system? (Choose two.)

A. Purchase order item of the category "Limit".

B. Valuated goods receipt for a purchase order item with a purchase order quantity of 100 pieces. Previous goods movements: Goods receipt of 80 pieces and return delivery to the vendor of 75 pieces.

C. Purchase order item for which a goods receipt was posted to non-valuated GR blocked stock.

D. Purchase order item with account assignment, for which a goods receipt is not planned.

You have set the rejection indicator in a quotation item. Can you still create a purchase order with reference to this quotation item?

A. No, a quotation item for which the rejection indicator is set cannot be converted into a purchase order.

B. Yes, but you have to enter the price in the purchase order manually since it is not copied from the quotation in this case.

C. Yes, you can create the purchase order regardless of the rejection indicator.

D. No, you have to maintain a new quotation first.

You maintain purchasing data in the vendor master record. At which levels in addition to purcharsing orgatization level can you do this ??

You perform a total planning run for a plant. On the initial screen, you can select a creation indicator for MRP list. Which of the following can determine whether an MRP list is created for a material

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purcharse order. The material has the material master record and account assigment category = K (cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L account were the posting made??

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purchase order. The material has a material master record and a material type for which quantity and value are updated. The purchase order item has the account assignment category K (= cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L accounts were the postings made? (Choose two.)

A. GR/IR clearing account

B. Consumption account

D. Price difference account

Page 10: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

A 137 No No

115 8 No Yes

115 33 No No

115 62 No No Break Down Lay out

115 21 No Yes

80 61 No No

115 87 No No Source determination Partner determination Price determination

115 68 No No Selection parameter Layout Break Down Scope of list

115 78 No No Basic data Purchasing Accounting

80 50 No NoA. Purchasing B. Accounting D. Basic Data

115 25 No No

You post an invoice with unplanned delivery cost. These cost should be posted in full to the stock account of material. What is required to achive this ?

The material effected must be valuated based on moving average price.

The material effected must be valuated based on standard price.

Sufficient stock on the effected material must be available to cover the invoice quantity

In the invoice header, you have to enter the stock account tio which the unplanned delivery cost are to be posted.

You procure a material using the consignment process. You want to ensure that purchase requisition created is going to used to this purpose

Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and select the regular vendor indicator

Activate the quota arrangement for the relevant material and create a quota arrangement item

Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and enter it as a fixed source of supply

Enter consignment as the special procurement type in the material master record

You received an invoice from a vendor for a material to the amount of 1000 euro, for 100 pieces. After you have entered the header data and the purchase order number, the system proposes a quantity of 70 and an amount of 700 euro, from the good receipt postings. How can you enter the invoice in the system without it being blocked for payment

Use manual invoice reduction, select the vendor error. Reduce invoice option, and enter the quantity and value invoiced by the vendor next to the quantity and value proposed.

Before posting the invoice, you change the payment block indicator in the invoice header to released for payment

Switch to document parking and then save the invoice

Define a tolerance group in the vendor master record of the relevant vendor before posting, so that the invoice is then reduce automatically when posted

You set up the document overview in the Enjoy SAP purchase order (transaction ME21N). What setting allows you to sort document by vendor first then by document number within vendor number

Default Values in Customizing

Personal settings for the transaction

You transfer material between two plants. During the transport process some part are damage. How can you post this as scrapping?

You put away the entire quantity to the receiving plant and post the scrapping there

You reverse the stock removal in the issuing plant and post the scrapping there

You put away the entire quantity to the receiving plant, then the issuing plant post the scrapping

You adjust the stock in transit and put away the remaining quantity in the receiving plant

You want to convert purchase requisitions into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

A. Source determination

B. Price determination

C. Message determination

D. Partner determination

You want to convert purchase requisitons into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

Message determination

You want to create a list of purchase order for which you have not received an invoice. What can you use to find these specific pruchase orders when entering your criteria for the search screen

You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum

General plant data / storage

You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum? (Choose two.)

C. General Plant Data/Storage

You want to post a goods issue from stock in quality inspection in which of the following cases is this possible

Withdrawal for inspection sample

Withdrawal for scrapping

Withdrawal for a cost center

Withdrawal for a reservation

I102
Claudia Rodriguez: Solo seria valida si es en un proceso de planeacion
Page 11: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

115 10 No No

A 119 No No

115 37 Yes No

115 3 Yes No TRUE FALSE

115 90 Yes No 40 30 20 10

115 61 Yes No 1045 1026 1050 1055

115 111 Yes No Verdadero FALSE

80 4 Yes No A. Plant B. Company code C. Valuation area D. Procurement type

115 48 Yes No partner schema Plant Partner Role Vendor Sub range

A 120 Yes No At which organization level do you maintain source list ? Client Company code Plant

Your company manage stock of various advertising articles on a quantity and value basis in the future you want to analyze the value of this advertising articles.Unfortunately, the articles has been classified with different materia type, material groups, valuations classes, and in different number range intervals for this reason you want to change the assignment.Which of the following changes are possible, even if stock exist for the articles?

You create a new number range interval and then change the material numbers of the advertising articles to a number in the new number range interval

You create a new valuation class and then change the valuation class of the advergising articles to the new valuation class

You create a new material type then change the material type of the advertising articles to the new material type

You create a new material group and then change the material group of the advertising articles to the new material group

Your company manages stock of variuos articles on a quantity and value basis. You want to analyze of this articles. Unfortunately , they have been created with different material valuation classes, and in different number range intervals. For this reason, you want to change the assigments. Which of the following changes are possible, even if stock exists for the articles ?

You create a new valuation class and change the valuation class of the advertasing articles to new valuation class

You create a new material group and change the material group of the advertasing articles to the new material group.

You create a new nember range interval and change the material numbers of the advertising articles to a number range interval.

you created a new material type and change the material type of the advertising articles to the new material type

A Purchase order has been issued on a vendor for two materials, 150 units of material A has been ordered at 4 uni/pc, 20 units of material B has been ordered at 45 UNI/pc. The vendor has supplied all the materials. The invoice for the supply has been received and posted. He now sends an invoice that includes 825 eur as freight charges and 125 eur as custom duty that was not planned. The system has been configured to distribute delivery costs amongst items. How will the cost be apportioned when the invoice is posted?

Stock account for material A 380 + Stock account for Material B 570 +

Stock account for Material A 500 +, Stock Account for Material B 450 +

Freight clearing 875 +

Custom clearing 125+

A purchasing organization must always be assigned to a company code

A release stategy for a purchase reqisition is defined as follows: Account aassigment category (blank), Plant (1000 or 1100) purchasing group (001), Material (m-01), Valutaion price (>200), quantity (>50). For next lines: For which purchase requisition item will this stategy be determinated?

A vendor offer you a mateial at the gross price of 1000 EUR in addition the vendor give you 10% discount and 5% cash discount and absolute freight amount 200. What is the EFECTIVE PRICE.Account determination always takes place on a plant dependent basisAt what level can you set quantity and value updating on a material type? At what level in the vendor master record is it possible to define purchasing data that is different from that which is maintained at client level

Purchasing organization

Page 12: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

GA 19 Yes No

80 7 Yes Yes

115 81 Yes No

115 23 Yes No Can you change reservation created automatically YES NO

A 125 Yes No

115 110 Yes No Yes No

80 41 Yes No

115 76 Yes No Flag which ones are item categories cost center limit asset consignment services

115 56 Yes No

115 42 Yes No

115 15 Yes No For which functions can you use transaction Migo Creating reservations Non of the above

80 19 Yes NoA. Cost center B. Profit center C. Production order E. Work center

GA 18 Yes No

Automatic purchase order generation for goods receipt .How can blocked purchase requisitions be released? (Choose two.)

A. Manually, using individual release

B. Manually, using the "Change Purchase Requisition" transaction

C. Manually, using collective release

D. Automatically, when purchase requisitions are converted into purchase orders

Before deliveries arrive from certain vendors, you want to be informed of the delivery date and quantity. To do this, you use a confirmation control key. Which of the following settings can you define in a confirmation control key?

A. Only the confirmed quantity can be posted when the goods are received.

B. Confirmations must be transmitted electronically.

C. The goods receipt can be posted no earlier than the confirmed delivery date.

D. The full confirmed quantity must be entered in one posting in the system.

Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries?

Using the mass maintenance tool

When creating info records

When creating a purchase order

When creating contracts

Deliveries Often arrive too late. You therefore want to send remainders to your vendor. Which prerequisites must be fulfilled to generates remainders for purchase order item ?

The purcharse order item has no account assigment category.

The delivery date is at least one week in the past

You have entered at least one remainder level in the purcharse order item.

the purchase order must be output.

Does the movement type with which a goods receipt is recorded have any influence on the G/L accounts of the GR postingDuring a physical inventory, the warehouse manager has decided to have the quantity of a material recounted for a physical inventory document. How is a recount processed in the system?

A. The new count quantity is entered in the existing physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted.

B. A new physical inventory document is created. The new count quantity is entered. When the inventory difference is now posted, all physical inventory documents still to be posted for the material affected are deleted.

C. A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. After the recount, the inventory difference for the old document is posted first, followed by the inventory difference for the new document.

D. A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. The new count quantity is entered in the new physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted.

For posting inventory differences, you can define tolerance group. What tolerance can you define?

Maximum difference amount for each physical inventory document

Maximum difference amount for each physical inventory document item

Maximum quantity variance for each physical inventory document item

Maximum percentage value variance for each physical inventory document item

Maximum difference amount for each storage location

For the evaluated receipt settlement, the following prerequisite must be fulfilled (Automatic Invoice verification)

The purchase order must be created automatically

The ERS delivery indicator must be set in the vendor master record

The ERS indicator must be set in the purchase order

A tax code must be specified in the order item

Freight conditions cannot be included in the PO price

Changing the material document

Deleting a material document

For which of the following objects can you post a goods issue directly from the valuated stock using a standard movement type? (Choose three.)

D. Project (= WBS element)

For which of the following transactions can the source of supply be determined automatically? (Choose two.)

A. Create reservation B. Create purchase order, vendor known

C. Create purchase order, vendor unknown

D. Create purchase requisition

Page 13: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

80 35 Yes No A. Client B. Company code C. Plant

80 16 Yes No

115 26 Yes No

80 68 Yes No

115 70 Yes No PO Requisition Quotation Contract

A 126

Yes No

80 30 Yes No

A. 100% B. 75% C. 67.5% D. 50%

80 32 Yes No

80 79 Yes No

A. Two B. Three C. One D. Any number

GA 8 Yes Yes

115 39 Yes No

For which organizational levels can you maintain the material status in material master records? (Choose two.)

D. Purchasing organization

For which transfer postings can an accounting document be generated if the postings are made with a valuated material? (Choose two.)

A. Transfer postings from GR blocked stock to unrestricted-use stock

B. Transfer postings between plants that have the same company code

C. Transfer postings from unrestricted-use stock to quality inspection stock

D. Transfer postings between two storage locations of one plant based on a two-step procedure

From which stock type can goods issues to cost center be posted

Unrestricted-use stock

Quality inspection stock

Valuated blocked stock

Non-valuated blocked stock

How can blocked purchase requisitions be released? (Choose two.)

A. Manually, using individual release

B. Manually, using the "Change Purchase Requisition" transaction

C. Manually, using collective release

D. Automatically, when purchase requisitions are converted into purchase orders

How can you give maintenance to a purchasing info record.

In a vendor master record , you enter a different vendor as a partner with partner role (partner funtion) Invoicing party. What is the funtion of this partner role in Materials Management ?

This partner is proposed when you enter an invoice with reference to purchase order.

All unplanned delivery costs with reference to purchase order are billed to this partner.

This partner automatically received copies for all message relating to purcharse document.

Return deliveries with reference to purchase orders must be send to this partner.

In Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification, the following values are defined for the stochastic block: Threshold value. 10000 Percentage. 50 You enter an invoice with a value of 15000. What is the probability that the invoice will be blocked stochastically?

In Logistics Invoice Verification, from where does the system determine the terms of payment for invoices without a purchase order reference?

A. From the last invoice for the vendor.

B. From the purchasing data in the vendor master record.

C. From the accounting data in the vendor master record.

D. From the first entry in the Customizing table for terms of payment.

In the future, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. To do this, they are to access catalogs directly from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N? In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the "My documents" overview. Which documents are displayed under "Purchase Orders"?

A. The purchase orders that you recently created

B. The purchase orders found by the system in the last document search

C. The purchase orders for which you last posted goods receipts

D. The purchase orders with today's date as the delivery date

In which cases you have to enter a subsequent debit in a logitics invoice verification

You received and invoice from a forwarding agent or unplanned delivery cost related to a delivery that it is not invoiced

You receive and invoice form a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery cost related to a Purchase Order, which has been invoiced

The vendor invoices a quantity higher than delivered for a purchase order in which good receipt is already done

You receive an invoice in foreign currency and the curren exchange rate is higher than the rate expected

Page 14: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

80 29 Yes Yes

80 27 Yes No

80 26 Yes No

80 13 Yes No

A 123 Yes No Client Company code

115 112 Yes No Valuation class Account grouping cod Item category Valuation Grouping coTransaction

A 133 Yes No

GA 25 Yes NoC. SAP Help D. Troubleshooting

115 57 Yes Yes Select 4 things what the material type control Number Range Language Direction

115 94 Yes No Solution Monitoring consists of the which tree components System monitoring

A 136 Yes No

In which of the following cases can invoices be released automatically? (Choose two.)

A. The invoice was blocked stochastically.

B. The invoice was blocked due to a price variance, and the buyer has now changed the price in the purchase order to the invoice price.

C. The invoice was blocked manually because the invoice price was lower than the order price, and the buyer has now changed the price in the purchase order to the invoice price.

D. The invoice was blocked on the entry date due to date variance. The current date is identical to the delivery date of the order item for which the invoice was blocked.

In which of the following cases do you have to enter a subsequent debit in Logistics Invoice Verification?

A. The vendor invoices a quantity higher than delivered for a purchase order item in which goods-receipt-based invoice verification is flagged.

B. You receive an invoice in foreign currency and the current exchange rate is higher than the rate specified in the purchase order.

C. You receive an invoice from a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery costs related to a purchase order item already invoiced.

D. You receive an invoice from a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery costs related to a delivery completed purchase order.

In which of the following cases do you have to maintain GR/IR clearing accounts in Logistics Invoice Verification?

A. The vendor has invoiced a price higher than the purchase order price.

B. You have posted an invoice incorrectly and canceled it afterwards.

C. For an item that has been delivered, a higher quantity was invoiced than delivered.

D. The vendor has invoiced a price lower than the purchase order price.

In which of the following cases is the goods receipt always posted as non-valuated?

A. Goods receipt for initial stock entry

B. Goods receipt to the stock of material provided to vendor

C. Goods receipt for a free-of-charge delivery

D. Goods receipt to the consignment stock

Info records can have texts for differents organizational levels. For which levels can you maintain these texts ??

Purchasing Organization in cobination with a Plant

Purchasing organization

Mention what are the principal and direct factor to determine the automatic account determination

Ocasionally a vendor delivers a goods witout a purchase order. You want the system to create a purcharse order for such deliveries automatically when a good receipt is posted. What are the prerequisites for this scenario ?

Automatic purchase order creation must be allowed for the movement type wich you post the good receipt

Automatic purchase order creation must be allowed for the plant and storege location to which you post the good receipt.

A reference purcharse organization must be assigned to the plant to which you post the good receipt

A standars purcharse organization must be assigned to the plant to which you post the good receipt.

SAP Solution Manager contains the Service Desk function. What functions does the Service Desk provide? (Choose two.)

A. Process for message processing

B. Management of SAP Notes

Procurement type (internal, external)

User department (views)

SAP service marketplace

Business process Monitoring

Service level reporting

Business process repository

The book quantity of a material is 100. the inventory count result is 0. How do you handle this count in a physical inventory document

You enter 0 in quantity field

You post a good issue with quantity 100.

You deleted the item from the physical inventory document.

You set the ZERO count indicator.

Page 15: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

115 85 Yes No TRUE FALSE

115 4 Yes No The storage location key 0001 may be used multiple times TRUE FALSE

115 113 Yes No Verdadero FALSE

115 114 Yes No Verdadero FALSE

GA 7 Yes No

GA 21 Yes No

115 96 Yes No What are the five phases of the implementation roadmap?

80 38 Yes No What can an MRP area include? (Choose three.) A. One plant B. Multiple plants

80 20 Yes No

80 18 Yes Yes

80 14 Yes Yes

GA 10 Yes Yes

The source determination in a purchase requistion finds a source of supply is the next sequence: 1 Quota Arrangement; 2 Source List, 3 Outline Agreement, 4 Info Record. This is true or false

To be able to use production planning (component PP) material valuation must be set up at company code levelValue strings can be changed and extended en each company according to particular requirementsWhat advantage does the collective number have in requests for quotations?

A. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for message output of requests for quotations.

B. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating info records from quotations.

C. The collective number makes it easier to select quotation documents for the price comparison.

D. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating source list entries from quotations.

What are characteristics of material valuation at the moving average price? (Choose two.)

A. Price difference postings can happen when posting an invoice receipt

B. Goods receipts are always valuated based on the moving average price from the material master record

C. The moving average price is equal to the total value multiplied by total quantity of stock

D. If a purchase requisition is created, the current moving average price is proposed as the valuation price

Project preparation, configuration blue print, realization, final publish, go live and support

Project prepartion, busines blueprint, realization, final preparation, go live and support

Project kick off, configuration blueprint, realizatión, final preparation, support

Project Kick off, business blueprint, realization final preparation, support

C. Multiple storage locations of a plant

D. One subcontractor

E. Multiple subcontractors

What can be changed in a material document after it has been posted?

A. The vendor delivery note number in the document header

B. The quantity at item level

C. The stock type at item level

D. The text at item level

What can be triggered by a goods receipt posting? (Choose three.)

A. The buyer receives a message about the goods received.

B. The requisitioner of a referenced purchase requisition receives a message about the goods received.

C. For stock material, the total quantity and total value are recalculated in the material master record.

D. Labels are printed.

E. The MRP controller receives a message about overdeliveries.

What can you define for a movement type in Customizing? (Choose two.)

A. The transactions in which a movement type can be used

B. The reversal movement types for a movement type

C. The quantity and value updates for postings with a movement type

D. The number range for material documents that are generated when postings are made with a movement type What can you derive from the purchase order

structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (Enter Invoice)? (Choose two.)

A. Whether blocked invoices exist for a purchase order item

B. Whether the goods receipt for a purchase order item was posted as valuated or non-valuated

C. The total of open items for a vendor in the current invoice

D. Whether there were return deliveries for a purchase order item

E. Whether there is a different invoicing party in the purchase order for this invoice

Page 16: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

A 131 Yes No Incoterms Terms of payments.

A 121 Yes No

80 48 Yes Yes A. Requester C. MRP controller D. Processing status

GA 4 Yes Yes

115 80 Yes No Delivery Date Aggregation horizon Creation´s JIT

80 43 Yes YesA. Book quantity

80 1 Yes No

80 23 Yes No

GA 29 Yes No

80 31 Yes No

GA 15 Yes No

What can you maintain in vendor master record as well as info record.

Mininum order quantity

Tolerances for undeliveries and overdeliveries

What can you specify when you assign a message schema to an application in Purchasing ?

the number of outputs for prints message

the access secuence for the message types in this application

the allowed mediums for outputs, for example print output or fax.

that a new message determination process is initiated for a change message.

What can you use to determine the origin of a purchase requisition?

B. Creation indicator

What characterizes an item category in purchasing? (Choose two.)

A. New item categories can be created in Customizing.

B. The item category contains a default value for the invoice receipt indicator in a purchase order item.

C. Any item category can be used in combination with any account assignment category in a purchase order.

D. The name of an item category can be changed in Customizing.

What control the creation profile in the scheduling agreement

Activate the schedule agreement

Tolerance limit for quantity changes

What data is displayed in the list of inventory differences? (Choose three.)

B. Quantity counted C. Difference quantity

D. Current plant stock

E. Date on which the difference is to be posted

What does an account group determine when vendor master records are created? (Choose three.)

A. The number range in which a vendor master record must be created for this account group

B. The default setting of the info update indicator in purchase orders for vendors in this account group

C. The field selection when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

D. The interval of the number assignment (internal or external)

E. The sequence of tab pages when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

What does the document type control when an invoice is entered? (Choose two.)

A. The number assignment (number range interval) for the invoice document

B. The number assignment (number range interval) for the accounting document

C. Whether the invoice is posted as gross or net

D. Whether the invoice is blocked for payment when posted

What features do subcontracting orders (item category L) have? (Choose two.)

A. The goods receipt for a subcontracting order must always be posted as valuated.

B. At least one component must be provided to the subcontractor.

C. Subcontracting orders may not have an account assignment.

D. The price in the purchase order contains both the service provided by the subcontractor and the value of the components.

E. For subcontracting orders, an invoice receipt is binding.

What happens when you cancel invoices in Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

A. The system generates a subsequent debit.

B. The system generates a credit memo.

C. G/L accounts will be newly determined.

D. The system deletes the original invoice document.

What information can you specify in a quota arrangement? (Choose two.)

A. Plant from which material is procured for stock transfer requirements

B. Outline agreement number for external procurement requirements

C. Vendor for external procurement requirements

D. Info record number for external procurement requirements

Page 17: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

GA 26 Yes No

What is "SAP ERP"?

80 10 Yes No

GA 28 Yes No

80 45 Yes No

115 24 Yes No

115 65 Yes No YES NO

GA 6 Yes No B. In contracts

GA 13 Yes NoWhere can you maintain the regular vendor?

115 20 Yes No

80 36 Yes No

80 2 Yes No

A. SAP ERP is an application that a company can use to manage its business processes efficiently.

B. SAP ERP is a system that contains components for purchasing, sales, materials management, production, and so on.

C. SAP ERP is a planning system in which enhanced planning processes can be represented.

D. SAP ERP is a technology platform that can be used as a basis for implementing customer-specific enhancements.

What is mandatory in a purchase order for a non-valuated material?

A. Set the indicator for goods receipt.

B. Select an account assignment category and assign an account assignment object.

C. Set the indicator for non-valuated goods receipts.

D. Set the indicator for invoice receipt.

What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparison to a standard purchase order (standard item category)?

A. Blanket purchase orders allow non-valuated goods receipts only.

B. Blanket purchase order items require an account assignment to be entered.

C. Blanket purchase orders items can have multiple account assignment.

D. Invoices for blanket purchase orders are always blocked by the system.

What special features apply to purchase orders of services (item category D)? (Choose two.)

A. Unknown account assignment is allowed.

B. The price can be determined from the service conditions.

C. All service lines must have the same account assignment.

D. When the service entry sheet is created only services contained in the purchase order can be entered.

What statements are true about dynamic availability check

You can not configure the message (warning or error)

You must asign the checking rule and the checking goup in the material master record

You can never withdrawal item from storage if the availability check is not enough

You can configure which kind of stock are taken into account for availability check

You use the availability check in reservation

When do you service entry sheets are saved, the material document is created and when the service entry sheet are approve, postings are made in financial accounting. It is true or falseWhere are only time-independent conditions defined for the procurement process?

A. In purchasing info records

C. In purchase orders

D. In scheduling agreements

A. In the source list at plant level

B. In the info record at client level

C. In the quota arrangement

D. In the info record at purchasing organization level

Which are the statement about transfer posting material to material

can only be carried out in a single step

can be preplanned via a reservation

can only be made form unrestricted-use stock of plant

is only possible if both materials are managed in the same order unit

The same material type

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object "plant"?

A. A plant can be assigned directly to one controlling area.

B. A plant can be assigned to several company codes.

C. A plant can be assigned to a reference purchasing organization.

D. A plant can be assigned to exactly one company code.

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object "purchasing organization".?

A. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple company codes

B. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple controlling areas

C. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple plants

D. Multiple purchasing groups can be assigned to a purchasing organization

J184
Claudia Rodriguez: Buscar en gestion de stock
Page 18: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

GA 31 Yes No

Which attributes do invoicing plans have? (Choose two.)

115 74 Yes No Which control the document type fiel selection number ranges permissible material

A 135 Yes No Material Number Price

80 3 Yes No A. Optional field C. Suppress D. Display

80 25 Yes NoA. Posting date B. Reference C. Invoice date D. Terms of payment

115 95 Yes No end user training Defining the project scope

115 92 Yes No not all above

115 100 Yes No vendor material Delivery date plant Quantity

80 11 Yes YesB. On-order stock C. Reorder point

80 15 Yes No

GA 24 Yes Yes

GA 27 Yes No

115 66 Yes No Which of the following statements are correct in services

A. Invoices for invoicing plans can be generated automatically.

B. The start date of an invoicing plan can be defined at item level.

C. Invoicing plans can be used for stock materials as well as for consumable materials.

D. The invoicing plan type for a purchase order item can be changed retroactively.

account determination

permissible item categories

Which entries are mandatory in a purcharse order item for consignment ?

Special procurement key Consignment

Item category Consignment

Which field attribute is given the highest priority in the field selection control?

B. Required entry field+

Which fields can you include in the check for duplicate invoices in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

Which of the following activites would occur in phase 3? Select the correct answers

Configuring the system

testing the system to ensure that it meets the specified business requirements

Developping training materials

which of the following are solution Manager Usage scenarios?

Monitor SAP support Desk

Implement SAP Solution

Upgrade SAP solution

Manage Change requests

Which of the following do you enter when you create a blanket purchase orderWhich of the following elements belong to warehouse stock available for MRP in net requirement calculation? (Choose three.)

A. Warehouse stock D. Non-valuated goods receipt blocked stock

E. Fixed purchase requisitions

Which of the following is a prerequisite for transfer postings between two materials ("material to material")?

A. The materials being transferred must have the same valuation class.

B. The materials being transferred must have the same material type.

C. The materials being transferred must have the same material group.

D. The materials being transferred must have the same base unit of measure.

Which of the following statements about SAP Solution Manager is correct?

A. SAP Solution Manager is a standalone system that communicates with the systems in the system landscape.

B. SAP Solution Manager is installed as a component of each of your existing landscapes.

C. SAP Solution Manager is used only for implementing your application.

D. SAP Solution Manager is an add-on industry solution.

Which of the following statements applies to the Enterprise Portal?

A. The portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different systems.

B. The portal is an interface for managing variants of frequently-used transactions.

C. The portal is only a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data.

D. The portal buffers all data so that work can continue in the portal if one of the assigned systems fails.

When procuring services, you can work with or without a service master record

The account assigment category unknown (U) is allowed only in purchase orders with item category D (Service).

You must specify a limit in a service item.

The service specification of a service item can be structured in a maximum of four hierarchy levels

You cannot specify just one limit in a service item. A service specification with at least one service must exist

Page 19: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

115 93 Yes No

115 17 Yes No

115 105 Yes No Rental payments electricity bills

A 118 Yes No Purchasing group User group Plant

115 19 Yes No Which procedures can generate an accounting document

GA 3 Yes No B. Contracts C. Invoicing plans

80 37 Yes NoA. Planned orders C. Schedule lines D. Purchase orders E. Production orders

80 72 Yes No B. Credit/Debit D. Posting key

GA 5 Yes No

115 18 Yes No Non of the above

115 103 Yes No

Which of the following statements best describes the purpose of the SAP Solution Manager

To provide the tools, content and service to implement, operate, monitor and support the SAP Solution

To provide the tools and content to support the functional and technical implementation of your SAP solutions

To provide the tools to support the implementation and setup of operations of your SAP solutions

To provide the tools and service to support the operations in all available SAP solution

Which of the following statements regarding other goods receipts is correct

Other goods receipts are receipts that cannot reference another document

There goods receipts are always non-valuated

The free of charge delivery does not bleong to this form of goods receipt

An initial stock balance entry is an other goods receipt

You can enter a value manually for some of these goods receipts

Which operations are periodic invoincing plans suitable for?

magazine subcriptions

Credit card settlements

Which parameter can you choose for a message type in purchasing

Purchasing organization

Material to material transfer posting

storage location to storage location from the same plant

Storege location to storage location from plant A to plant B

Which procurement element can be created in Purchasing with automatic purchase order generation?

A. Delivery schedules D. Contract release orders

Which procurement elements can be generated in the material requirements planning run for a material that is procured only externally? (Choose three.)

B. Purchase requisitions

Which rule can be selected in account determination for Inventory postings (Transaction BSX)?

A. General modification

C. Valuation modification

Which settings can be made for account assignment categories? (Choose two.)

A. The field selection for all fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category.

B. The field selection for the account assignment fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category.

C. The field selection for all fields of the purchase order header can be defined based on the account assignment category.

D. New account assignment categories can be created in Customizing.

Which statements about shelf life expiration date check are correct

You must maintain the remainging shelf life in the PO

You must to activate the shelf life expiration date for plant and movement type to use this fuction

If the shelf life expiration date is shorten than the remaining shelf life the system always send a warning message

Which statements about the subcontracting process are correct

You must set the especial stock indicator O in the purchase order

You order material for a customer, which is then delivered directly to de customer by the vendor

The vendor must be entered in the material master record as an eligible manufacturer

The vendor must be entered inthe BOM as an eligible manufacturer

Inthe purchase order, use item category L

Page 20: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

115 88 Yes No

80 42 Yes No A. Count status C. Delete status E. Material status

115 97 Yes No

115 49 Yes No Planned delivery time

115 22 Yes No

80 24 Yes No

GA 22 Yes No

80 28 Yes No

115 38 Yes No

115 59 Yes No

Which statements regarding the release of a purchase requisition

The release status describes which follow-on documents can be generated from purchase requisition

The aim of the release strategy is to control transmission of the requisition

You can have just 2 release strategys

The document type of the requisition determines whether the entire requisition is assigned to a release strategy or whether the release strategies are assigned on an item-wise basis

Which statuses are updated at header level in a physical inventory document? (Choose three.)

B. Adjustment status

D. Physical inventory status

Which the following statements applies to the enterprise portal

The portal is an interface for managing variants of frecuently used transaction

The portal buffers all data so that work continue in the portal

the portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different system

The portal is a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data

Which times belongs to replenishment lead time in the planning run for the external procurement

Purchasing processing time

Minimum remaining shelf life

Good receipt processing time

Requirement lead time

Which to the following is a prerequisite for transfer postings between two materials

The materials being transferred must have the same material type

The materials being transferred must have the same base unit of mature

The materials being transferred must have the same valuation class

The materials being transferred must have the same material group

Which two options can you define in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification to manage unplanned delivery costs for invoice receipts? (Choose two.)

A. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a price difference account.

B. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a separate G/L account for unplanned delivery costs.

C. The unplanned delivery costs are to be split across the invoice items.

D. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a specific cost center. Answer: B,C

Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials?

A. All valuation classes from the account category reference assigned to the material type.

B. Any valuation class.

C. All valuation classes of the valuation grouping code of the used valuation area.

D. The default valuation class from the user parameters.

With reference to which of the following objects can you enter an invoice in Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

A. A material document

B. A service entry sheet

C. A vendor delivery note

D. A different invoice from the vendor

Write what are the information that you need to allocate in the invoice verification to post invoices without reference to Purchase Order

basic data: posting date, document date, amount, currency, tax code payment:base line date, payment term

basic data: posting date, document date, amount, reference, tax code payment: base line date, paymente term, payment method

This function is not possible

You can set the rejection indicator in the quotation item. Can you still create a Purchase Order with reference to this quotation item?

Yes, but you have to enter the price manually since it is not copied from the quotation

No, you have to maintain a new quotation first

Yes, you can create the purchase order regardless of the rejection indicator

No, a quotation item for which the rejection indicator is set can not be converted into a purchase order

Page 21: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

80 33 Yes NoB. Purchasing C. Accounting D. Basic Data E. Forecasting

GA 17 Yes No

A 134 Yes No

GA 2 Yes Yes

A 138 Yes No Plant Material group Document Type.

GA 9 Yes Yes

A 117 Yes No

115 35 Yes No 50% 67.50% 100% 75%

80 40 Yes No

A. Procurement type C. MRP type D. MRP controller

You can use profiles to help you enter data in material master records. For which user departments are profiles available? (Choose two.)

A. Material Requirements Planning

You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that are open for delivery from the relevant vendor. What happens when the price is changed in the info record?

A. The moving average price of the material is recalculated.

B. The new price is immediately proposed for all new purchase orders created for the relevant material with the respective vendor.

C. The PO price in the purchase orders that are still open is automatically changed to the new price.

D. Invoice verification automatically receives a message about the price change made.

You create a purcharse requisition for 10 pallets of copier paper belonging to material gruop 4711. This material has no material master record. Which of the following souce of supply can be proposed by the system ?

A quantity contract item for 500 pallets of copier paper for a stock material that belongs to material group 4711

A value contract item with category W (material group) for articles of material group 4711.

an info record for material without a material master record for copier paper of material group 4711 with tons as unit of measurements.

A central contract item with category item M (material unknown) for 100 tons of copier paper of material group 4711.

You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?

A. In the language in which you are logged on to the system

B. In the language defined in the vendor master record

C. In the language of the purchase order header

D. In the language defined in the output determination Customizing settings

you create a purchase requisition. What control the field selection.

Purchase organization

You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are selected while others are not. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system? (Choose two.)

A. Purchase order item of the category "Limit".

B. Valuated goods receipt for a purchase order item with a purchase order quantity of 100 pieces. Previous goods movements: Goods receipt of 80 pieces and return delivery to the vendor of 75 pieces.

C. Purchase order item for which a goods receipt was posted to non-valuated GR blocked stock.

D. Purchase order item with account assignment, for which a goods receipt is not planned.

You have a open purcharse order for a valuated material. What changes can you make to the master data here ?

fixed vendor in the source list from vendor A to vendor B.

Material gruop in the material master from material gruop 1 to material gruop 2

base unit of measure in the material master from EA( (each) to KG (kilogram)

Material typo from ROH (raw material) to FERT (finisshed product)

You have set up the stochastic check in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification as follows: At a threshold value of 10,000 euros, there is a 50% likelihood of an invoice being blocked. What is the likelihood of an invoice with a value of 15,000 Euros being blocked

You perform a total planning run for a plant. On the initial screen, you can select a creation indicator for MRP lists. Which of the following can determine whether an MRP list is created for a material?

B. Exception message

Page 22: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

A 127 Yes No

115 16 Yes No

GA 20 Yes No

C. Stock account

80 21 Yes No

80 5 Yes Yes

A 130 Yes No

80 22 Yes No

A 122 Yes No

You post a good receipt for a purcharse order item. The material has Material Type NLAG ( non-stock material) what are the effect ??

The value is posted a consuption account

The quantity is posted in consuption.

The value is posted to a price different account

The quantity is posted to a special stock for non-stock material.

You post a goods receipt to the non-valuated GR blocked stock movement type 103. What are the effects of this?

The quantity booked into GR Blocked stock is not yet available for MRP

The open PO quantity is reduce by the GR blocked stock

In the case of valuated materials, an accounting document is generated

The quantity booked into GR blocked stocks is recorded in the PO history

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purchase order. The material has a material master record and a material type for which quantity and value are updated. The purchase order item has the account assignment category K (= cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L accounts were the postings made? (Choose two.)

A. GR/IR clearing account

B. Consumption account

D. Price difference account

You post an invoice with unplanned delivery costs. These costs should be posted in full to the stock account of a material. What prerequisites must be met to achieve this? (Choose two.)

A. The material affected must be valuated based on the standard price.

B. The material affected must be valuated based on the moving average price.

C. Stock of the affected material must be available at least in the invoiced quantity.

D. In the invoice header, you have to enter the stock account to which the unplanned delivery costs are to be posted.

You procure a material using the "Consignment" process. You want to ensure that purchase requisitions with the "Consignment" item category are generated automatically for requirements in requirements planning. Which of the following settings allows you to do this? (Choose two.)

A. Enter "Consignment" as the special procurement type in the material master record.

B. Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and enter it as a fixed source of supply in the source list.

C. Activate the quota arrangement for the relevant material and create a quota arrangement item using "Consignment" as the special procurement type.

D. Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and select the "Regular Vendor" indicator in the record.

You receipt a confirmation from, vendor. What do you have to do before you can enter the confirmed delivery date and quantity in a purcharse order item.

Set the good receipt indicator.

Choose a delivery date at least one month in the future.

Use a confirmation control key in the revelant purcharse order item.

Set the aknowlegement required indicator in the vendor master of relevant vendor.

You receive an invoice from a vendor for a material to the amount of EUR 1,000 for 100 pieces. After you have entered the header data and the purchase order number, the system proposes a quantity of 70 pieces and an amount of EUR 700 from the goods receipt postings. How can you enter the invoice in the system without it being blocked for payment? (Choose two.)

A. Switch to document parking and then save the invoice.

B. Define a tolerance group in the vendor master record of the relevant vendor before posting, so that the invoice is then reduced automatically when posted.

C. Use the manual invoice reduction, select the "Vendor Error: Reduce Invoice" option, and enter the quantity and value invoiced by the vendor next to the quantity and value proposed.

D. Before posting the invoice, you change the payment block indicator in the invoice header to "Released for Payment".

You send material a subcontractor by posting a good issue from the stock Monitoring List for Subcontractor. Where will you find the posted quantity afterwards in inventory Managements ?

In a special stock, at storage location level from which the good issue was posted.

In a separate storage location

in a special stock, at the plant level from which the good issue was posted.

In the consuption values of the material master as consumed quantity

Page 23: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

80 49 Yes No

A. Breakdown B. Layout

80 17 Yes Yes

A 128 Yes No

GA 12 Yes No

80 47 Yes No

A. Scope of list C. Layout D. Breakdown

GA 1 Yes NoA. Purchasing B. Accounting D. Basic Data

80 12 Yes No

115 84 Yes No

80 6 Yes No

You set up the document overview in the Enjoy SAP purchase order (transaction ME21N). What setting allows you to sort documents by vendor first and then by document number within a vendor?

C. Personal settings for the transaction

D. Default values in Customizing

You transfer material between two plants. During the transport process, some parts are damaged so badly that they have to be scrapped. How you can you post this as scrapping? (Choose two.)

A. You reverse the stock removal in the issuing plant and post the scrapping there.

B. You put away the entire quantity in the receiving plant and post the scrapping there.

C. You adjust the stock in transit and put away the remaining quantity in the receiving plant.

D. You put away the entire quantity in the receiving plant, where you immediately carry out a physical inventory of the material.

you want automatically the system deleted old reservation for which no movement were posted . What is the prerequisiter for this.

A retention period for reservation item must be defied

Good movements for the reservation must be allowed

The reservation must be an automatic reservation.

An available check for the reservation must have been carried out successfully.

You want to convert purchase requisitions into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

A. Source determination

B. Price determination

C. Message determination

D. Partner determination

You want to create a list of all purchase orders for which you have not yet received an invoice. What can you use to find these specific purchase orders when entering your criteria for the search query?

B. Selection parameter

You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum? (Choose two.)

C. General Plant Data/Storage

You want to post a goods issue from stock in quality inspection. In which of the following cases is this possible? (Choose two.)

A. Withdrawal for scrapping

B. Withdrawal for inspection sample

C. Withdrawal for a reservation

D. Withdrawal for a cost center

You would like to convert assigned purchase requisitions into follow-on documents. Which of the following statements apply?

You can convert several requisition items from the same vendor to a purchase order. In this case, one requisition item is generated for each PO item

You can convert several requisition items from the same vendor to a purchase order. In doing so, requistion items with the same material are automatically combined for one PO item

If the assigned source was blocked after the assigment was made in the source list, it is not possible to convert the relevant requisition item

You can convert SA delivery schedule lines and contract release orders together

Your company manages stock of various advertising articles on a quantity and value basis. In the future, you want to analyze the value of these advertising articles. Unfortunately, the articles have been created with different material types, material groups, valuation classes, and in different number range intervals. For this reason, you want to change the assignments. Which of the following changes are possible, even if stock exists for the articles?

A. You create a new material group and then change the material group of the advertising articles to the new material group.

B. You create a new material type and then change the material type of the advertising articles to the new material type.

C. You create a new valuation class and then change the valuation class of the advertising articles to the new valuation class.

D. You create a new number range interval and then change the material numbers of the advertising articles to a number in the new number range interval.

Page 24: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3 4 5

A 132 Yes No Purcharse value key material type Plans parameter.Yours vendors don´t always send the exact quantities. You therefore allow tolerances for underdeliveries and overdeliveries. Where can you define defauls for this tolerances.

user-spefic setting in the good movements transaction MIGO

Page 25: Material de Referencia MM
Page 26: Material de Referencia MM
Page 27: Material de Referencia MM

Defining the project scope

Page 28: Material de Referencia MM

7:53 9:15 1:22

Consultar en N Question ANSWER1 2 3 4 5

TSCM50 1-A, figure 7,8,9 y 10 1

TSCM50 1-A, 36 2

TSCM50 1-A, figure 7,8,9 y 10 3 TRUE FALSETSCM50 1-A, figure 7,8,9 y 10 4 The storage location key 0001 may be used multiple times TRUE FALSE

5 Required entry field Display Optional Supress

TSCM50 1-A, Figure 72 and note in pag 2096 Procurement type Valuation area Company Code Plant

7

TSCM50 1-A Figure 54 8

TSCM50 1-A pag 309 to 311 9

10

TSCM50 1-A Figure 88 11 What can be triggered by a good receipt posting? Label are printed

12

13

14 Warehouse stock Reorder point Fixed purchase requisition On-order stock

15 For which functions can you use transaction Migo Creating reservations Deleting a material document Non of the above

TSCM50 1-A pag 221 16

17

18 Non of the above

19 Which procedures can generate an accounting document

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object purchase organization?

Purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple controlling areas

Multiple Purchasing group can be assigned to a purchasing organization

Purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple company codes

Purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple plants

Purchasing organization can be assigned to storage locations

What does an account group determine when vendor master records are created?

The number range in which a vendor master record must be created for this account group

The field selection when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

The sequence of tabe pages when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

The default settings of the info update indicator in purchase orders for vendors in this account group

The interval of the number assignment (internal or external)

A purchasing organization must always be assigned to a company code

Which fields attribute is given highest priority in the field selection controlAt what level can you set quantity and value updating on material type

For a material without material master record, a source of supply is to be found when a purchase requisition is created. Which of the following source of supply is proposed by the system

Quantity contract for over 500 pallets of copier paper for stock material that belongs to material group 4711

Value contract for material 4711

Value contract with item category W (material group) for aticles of material group 4711

SRM Central contract with item category M (Material unknown) for 100 ton of copier paper of material group 4711

You procure a material using the consignment process. You want to ensure that purchase requisition created is going to used to this purpose

Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and select the regular vendor indicator

Activate the quota arrangement for the relevant material and create a quota arrangement item

Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and enter it as a fixed source of supply

Enter consignment as the special procurement type in the material master record

Before deliveries arrive from certain vendors, you want to be informed of the delivery date and quantity. Which of the following settings can you define in a confirmation control key?

Confirmations must be transmitted electronically

The goods receip can be posted no earlier than the confirmed delivery date

The full confirmed quantity must be entered in one posting in the system

Only the confirmed quantity can be posted when the goods are received

Your company manage stock of various advertising articles on a quantity and value basis in the future you want to analyze the value of this advertising articles.Unfortunately, the articles has been classified with different materia type, material groups, valuations classes, and in different number range intervals for this reason you want to change the assignment.Which of the following changes are possible, even if stock exist for the articles?

You create a new number range interval and then change the material numbers of the advertising articles to a number in the new number range interval

You create a new valuation class and then change the valuation class of the advergising articles to the new valuation class

You create a new material type then change the material type of the advertising articles to the new material type

You create a new material group and then change the material group of the advertising articles to the new material group

For stock material, the total quantity and total value are recalculated in the material master record

The MRP controller receives a message about over deliveries

The buyer receives a message about the good received

The requisitioner of a refereced purchased requisition receives a message about the good received

What is mandatory in a purchase order for a non-valuated material?

Set the indicator for non-valuated good receipt

Set the indicator for good receipt

Set the indicator for the invoice receipt

Select an account assignment category and assign and account assignment object

For which transfer posting can an account document be generated if the postings are made with a valuated material

Transfer posting from unrestricted use stock to quality inspection stock

Transfer posting between plants that have the same company code

Transfer posting between storage location of one plant on a two step procedure

Transfer posting from GR block stock to unrestricted use stock

Which of the following elements belong to warehouse stock available for MRP in net requirement

Non-valuated goods receipt block stockChanging the material document

You post a goods receipt to the non-valuated GR blocked stock movement type 103. What are the effects of this?

The quantity booked into GR Blocked stock is not yet available for MRP

The open PO quantity is reduce by the GR blocked stock

In the case of valuated materials, an accounting document is generated

The quantity booked into GR blocked stocks is recorded in the PO history

Which of the following statements regarding other goods receipts is correct

Other goods receipts are receipts that cannot reference another document

There goods receipts are always non-valuated

The free of charge delivery does not bleong to this form of goods receipt

An initial stock balance entry is an other goods receipt

You can enter a value manually for some of these goods receipts

Which statements about shelf life expiration date check are correct

You must maintain the remainging shelf life in the PO

You must to activate the shelf life expiration date for plant and movement type to use this fuction

If the shelf life expiration date is shorten than the remaining shelf life the system always send a warning message

Material to material transfer posting

storage location to storage location from the same plant

Storege location to storage location from plant A to plant B

Page 29: Material de Referencia MM

Consultar en N Question ANSWER1 2 3 4 5

20 The same material type

21

22

23 Can you change reservation created automatically YES NO

* 24 What statements are true about dynamic availability check

TSCM50 1-A pag 221 25 Withdrawal for scrapping Withdrawal for a cost center Withdrawal for a reservation

26 From which stock type can goods issues to cost center be posted Unrestricted-use stock Quality inspection stock Valuated blocked stock Non-valuated blocked stock

27 Project (WBS element) Cost Center Work Center Production Order Profit Center

TSCM50 1-A Figure 54 28

29 What can you defined in a movement type in Customizing

30 Quantity at item level Text at the item level Stock type at item level

TSCM50 1-A figure 28 31 A vendor delivery note A service entry sheet A material document

32 What does the documet type control when an invoice is entered?

* 33

34

35 50% 67.50% 100% 75%

36 Stochasticaly blocked invoices Manually blocked invoices

37 Freight clearing 875 + Custom clearing 125+

Which are the statement about transfer posting material to material

can only be carried out in a single step

can be preplanned via a reservation

can only be made form unrestricted-use stock of plant

is only possible if both materials are managed in the same order unit

You transfer material between two plants. During the transport process some part are damage. How can you post this as scrapping?

You put away the entire quantity to the receiving plant and post the scrapping there

You reverse the stock removal in the issuing plant and post the scrapping there

You put away the entire quantity to the receiving plant, then the issuing plant post the scrapping

You adjust the stock in transit and put away the remaining quantity in the receiving plant

Which to the following is a prerequisite for transfer postings between two materials

The materials being transferred must have the same material type

The materials being transferred must have the same base unit of mature

The materials being transferred must have the same valuation class

The materials being transferred must have the same material group

You can not configure the message (warning or error)

You must asign the checking rule and the checking goup in the material master record

You can never withdrawal item from storage if the availability check is not enough

You can configure which kind of stock are taken into account for availability check

You use the availability check in reservation

You want to post a goods issue from stock in quality inspection in which of the following cases is this possible

Withdrawal for inspection sample

For which of the following objects can you post a good issue directly from the valuated stock using a standard movement typeIn which of the following cases is the good receipt always posted as non- valuated

Good receipt to the stock of material provided to vendor

Good receipt for initial stock entry

Goods receipt to the consignment stock

Goods receipt for a free-of-charge delivery

The reversal movement type for a movement type

The quantity and value updates for posting with a movement type

The number range for a material document that is generated when a posting are made

Transaction in which movement time can be used

What can be changed in a material document after it has been posted

Vendor delivery note number in the document header

With reference to which of the following objects can you enter an invoice in Logistic Invoice Verification

A difference invoice from the vendor

Whether the invoice is blocked for payment when posted

The number assignment (number range interval) for the invoice document

The number assignment (number range interval) for the accounting document

Whether the invoice is posted as gross or net

You received an invoice from a vendor for a material to the amount of 1000 euro, for 100 pieces. After you have entered the header data and the purchase order number, the system proposes a quantity of 70 and an amount of 700 euro, from the good receipt postings. How can you enter the invoice in the system without it being blocked for payment

Use manual invoice reduction, select the vendor error. Reduce invoice option, and enter the quantity and value invoiced by the vendor next to the quantity and value proposed.

Before posting the invoice, you change the payment block indicator in the invoice header to released for payment

Switch to document parking and then save the invoice

Define a tolerance group in the vendor master record of the relevant vendor before posting, so that the invoice is then reduce automatically when posted

In Logistics Invoice Verification form where does the system determine the terms of payment for invoices with out PO

From the purchasing data in the vendor master record

From the fist entry in the customizing table for term of payment

From the last invoice form the vendor

From the accounting data in the vendor master record

You have set up the stochastic check in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification as follows: At a threshold value of 10,000 euros, there is a 50% likelihood of an invoice being blocked. What is the likelihood of an invoice with a value of 15,000 Euros being blocked

In which of the following cases can invoices be released automatically

Invoices that were blocked due to a quantity variance, provided that the entire invoiced quantity has in the meantime been posted as a goods receipt

Invoices that were blocked due to a quantity variance provided that the delivery date has in the meantime been reached

Invoices that were blocked due to a price variance provided that the PO price now matches the invoice price

A Purchase order has been issued on a vendor for two materials, 150 units of material A has been ordered at 4 uni/pc, 20 units of material B has been ordered at 45 UNI/pc. The vendor has supplied all the materials. The invoice for the supply has been received and posted. He now sends an invoice that includes 825 eur as freight charges and 125 eur as custom duty that was not planned. The system has been configured to distribute delivery costs amongst items. How will the cost be apportioned when the invoice is posted?

Stock account for material A 380 + Stock account for Material B 570 +

Stock account for Material A 500 +, Stock Account for Material B 450 +

Page 30: Material de Referencia MM

Consultar en N Question ANSWER1 2 3 4 5

38 This function is not possible

TSCM50 1-A, figure 96, 97 y 98 39

40

41

42

43

44 Term of payment Invoice date Posting date Reference

45

TSCM50 1-A figure 47 and pag 11646 Basic data Purchasing Forecast Accounting

47 Company Code Purchase organization Plant Client

TSCM50 1-A, figure 34 48 partner schema Plant Partner Role Vendor Sub range

49 Purchasing processing time Minimum remaining shelf life Good receipt processing time Planned delivery time Requirement lead time

50 production orders purchase requisition Scheduling lines Purchase Order Planned Orders

51 What can an MRP area include? One subcontractor Multiple subcontractor One plant Multiple plants Multiple Storage Locations

52 Exception message MRP type MRP Controller Procurement type

53 What data is display in the list of inventory differences? Quantity count Difference quantity Book quantity Current plan stock

54 Physical inventory status Material status Delete status Adjustment status Count status

55

56

TSCM50 1-A, figure 43 57 Select 4 things what the material type control Number Range User department (views) Language Direction

Write what are the information that you need to allocate in the invoice verification to post invoices without reference to Purchase Order

basic data: posting date, document date, amount, currency, tax code payment:base line date, payment term

basic data: posting date, document date, amount, reference, tax code payment: base line date, paymente term, payment method

In which cases you have to enter a subsequent debit in a logitics invoice verification

You received and invoice from a forwarding agent or unplanned delivery cost related to a delivery that it is not invoiced

You receive and invoice form a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery cost related to a Purchase Order, which has been invoiced

The vendor invoices a quantity higher than delivered for a purchase order in which good receipt is already done

You receive an invoice in foreign currency and the curren exchange rate is higher than the rate expected

What happens when you cancel invoices in logistics invoice verification?

The system generates a credit memo

The system deletes the original invoice document

The system generates a subsequent debit

GL/Accounts will be newly determined

Which two options can you define in customizing for logistics invoice verification to manage unplanned delivery cost

The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to specific cost center

The unplanned delivery costs are to be split across the invoice items

The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a separate G/L account for unplanned delivery costs

The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a price difference account

For the evaluated receipt settlement, the following prerequisite must be fulfilled (Automatic Invoice verification)

The purchase order must be created automatically

The ERS delivery indicator must be set in the vendor master record

The ERS indicator must be set in the purchase order

A tax code must be specified in the order item

Freight conditions cannot be included in the PO price

In which of the following cases you have to maintain GR/IR clearing account in Logistics Inovice Verification

You posted an invoice incorrectly and canceled it afterwards

The vendor invoiced a price lower that a procure order price

For an item that has been delivered, a higher quantity was invoiced than delivered

The vendor has invoiced a price higher than the purchase order price

Which field can you include in the check for duplicate invoices in customizing for logistic invoice verification

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object plant?

A Plant can be assigned to a exactly one company code

A Plant can be assigned directly to one controlling area

A plant can be assigned to a reference purchasing organization

A plant can be assigned to several company codes

You can use profile to help you enter data in material master record. For which user departments are profile available

Material Requierement Planning Run

For Which organizational levels can you maintain the material status in material master record

At what level in the vendor master record is it possible to define purchasing data that is different from that which is maintained at client level

Which times belongs to replenishment lead time in the planning run for the external procurementWhich procurement elements can be generated in the material requirement planning run for a material that is externally procured

You perform a total planning run for a plant. On the initial screen, you can select a creation indicator for MRP list. Which of the following can determine whether an MRP list is created for a material

Date on which the difference is to be posted

Which statuses are updated at header level in a physical inventory document

During the physical inventory, the warehouse manager has decided to have a quantity of a material recounted for a physical inventory document. How is a recounted processed in the system?

A new physical inventory document is created with reference to a original document. The new counted quantity is entered in the new physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted

The new count quantity is entered in the existing physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted

A new physical inventory document is created. The new count quantity is entered. When the inventory difference is now posted, all physical inventory documents still to be posted for the material affected are deleted

A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. After the recount, the inventory difference for the old document is posted first, followed by the inventory difference for the new document

For posting inventory differences, you can define tolerance group. What tolerance can you define?

Maximum difference amount for each physical inventory document

Maximum difference amount for each physical inventory document item

Maximum quantity variance for each physical inventory document item

Maximum percentage value variance for each physical inventory document item

Maximum difference amount for each storage location

Procurement type (internal, external)

Page 31: Material de Referencia MM

Consultar en N Question ANSWER1 2 3 4 5

58

59

TSCM50 1-A, figure 53 60 Contracts Purchase order Scheduling agreement info record

TSCM50 1-A Figure 54 61 1045 1026 1050 1055

TSCM50 1-A, figure 63 62 Break Down Default Values in Customizing Lay out

TSCM50 1-A, figure 57 63

TSCM50 1-A, figure 110 64 Processing status Creation indicator MEP Controller Requester

TSCM50 1-A, pag 374 65 YES NO

TSCM50 1-A, pag 394 66 Which of the following statements are correct in services

TSCM50 1-A, pag 368 67

TSCM50 1-A, pag 404 68 Selection parameter Layout Break Down Scope of list

TSCM50 2-A, pag 247 69 Invoicing plan Contracts Contracts release order Delivery Schedules

TSCM50 1-A, figure 68, 69, 70 y 7170 How can you give maintenance to a purchasing info record. PO Requisition Quotation Contract

71

72

73

74 Which control the document type account determination fiel selection number ranges permissible material permissible item categories

You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?

In the language of the purchase order header

In the language in which you are logged on to the system

In the language defined in the output determination customizing settings

In the language defined in the vendor master record

You can set the rejection indicator in the quotation item. Can you still create a Purchase Order with reference to this quotation item?

Yes, but you have to enter the price manually since it is not copied from the quotation

No, you have to maintain a new quotation first

Yes, you can create the purchase order regardless of the rejection indicator

No, a quotation item for which the rejection indicator is set can not be converted into a purchase order

Where are only time-independet condition defined for the procurement process

A vendor offer you a mateial at the gross price of 1000 EUR in addition the vendor give you 10% discount and 5% cash discount and absolute freight amount 200. What is the EFECTIVE PRICE.

Level 1 Condition type = PB01, Description = gross price, from (blank)Level 10, Condition type RB01, Description = Discount %, from = 1Level 15, Condition type= ZC01, Description=Sub charge %, from = 1Level 20, , Description = NET VALUELevel 30, Condition type = FRB01, Description = Absolute freight amount, from =20Level 35, Condition type = SKTO, Description = Cash discount, from = 20Level 40, , Description = EFECTIVE PRICE

You set up the document overview in the Enjoy SAP purchase order (transaction ME21N). What setting allows you to sort document by vendor first then by document number within vendor number

Personal settings for the transaction

What advantage does the collective number have in request for quatations?

The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating source list entries

The collective number makes it easier to select quotation documents for the price comparison

The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating info records

The collective number makes it easier to select documents for message output of request for quotation

What can you use to determine the origin of a purchase requisition?When do you service entry sheets are saved, the material document is created and when the service entry sheet are approve, postings are made in financial accounting. It is true or false

When procuring services, you can work with or without a service master record

The account assigment category unknown (U) is allowed only in purchase orders with item category D (Service).

You must specify a limit in a service item.

The service specification of a service item can be structured in a maximum of four hierarchy levels

You cannot specify just one limit in a service item. A service specification with at least one service must exist

What special features apply to purchase orders of services (item category D)

The price can be determinated from the service conditions

When the service sheet is created only services contained in the purchase order can be display

All the services line must have the same account assignment

Unknow account assigment is allowed

You want to create a list of purchase order for which you have not received an invoice. What can you use to find these specific pruchase orders when entering your criteria for the search screen

Which procurement elements can be created in purchasing with automatic purchase order generation

You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are already selected when you call the purchse order. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system?

Purchase order item with account assignment, for which a goods receipt is not planned

Purchase order item for which a goods receipt was posted to non-valuated GR blocked stock

Purchase order item of the category limit

Valuated good receipt for a purchase order item with a purchase order quantity of 100 pc

What can you defined from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (enter invoice)

Whether the goods receipt for a purchase order item was posted as valuated or non-valuated

Total of open item for a vendor in the current invoice

Whether there is a different invoicing party in the purchase order for this invoice

Whether there were return deliveries for a purchase order item

Whether block invoices exist for a purchase order item

In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the my documents overview. Which documents are displayed under Purchase Orders

The purchase order found by the system in the last document search

The purchase orders that you recently created

The purchase orders with today´s date as the delivery date

The purchase orders for which you last posted goods receipts

Page 32: Material de Referencia MM

Consultar en N Question ANSWER1 2 3 4 5

75 Which settings can be made for account assigment categories?

76 Flag which ones are item categories cost center limit asset consignment services

77 What characterizes an item category in purchasing

78 General plant data / storage Basic data Purchasing Accounting

79

80 What control the creation profile in the scheduling agreement Delivery Date Aggregation horizon Creation´s JIT

81 Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries? When creating info records When creating contracts

82 Where can you mantain the regular vendor? In the source list at plant level In the quota arragement

83 What information can you specify in a quota arrangement?

84

85 TRUE FALSE

86 Create purchase requisition Create reservation

87 Source determination Message determination Partner determination Price determination

88 Which statements regarding the release of a purchase requisition

89 How can block purchase requisition be released?

New account assigment category can be created in customizing

The field selection for the account assignment fields of a purchase order can be defined base on the account assignment category

The field selection for all fields of the purchase order header can be defined base on the account assignment category

The field selection for all fields of a purchase order item can bedefined base on the account assignment category

TSCM50 1-A figure 101 (AAC)TSCM50 1-A Figure 130 (IC)

New item category can be created in customizing

The name of an item category can be changed in customizing

The item category contains a default value for the invoice receipt indicator in a purchase order items

Any item category can be used in combination with an account assignment category in a purchase order

You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum

You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that apply the info record. What happens when the price is chaged in the info record

The moving average price of the material is recalculated

The PO price in the purchase orders that are still open is automatically changed to the new price

Invoice verification automatically receives a message about he price change made

The new price is inmediately proposed for all new purchase orders created for the relevant material with the respective vendor

Activate the schedule agreement

Tolerance limit for quantity changes

Using the mass maintenance tool

When creating a purchase orderIn the info record at purchasing organization level

In the info record at client level

Outline agreement number external procurement requirements

Vendor for external procurements requirements

Info record number for external procurement requirements

Plant from which material is procured for stock transfer requirements

You would like to convert assigned purchase requisitions into follow-on documents. Which of the following statements apply?

You can convert several requisition items from the same vendor to a purchase order. In this case, one requisition item is generated for each PO item

You can convert several requisition items from the same vendor to a purchase order. In doing so, requistion items with the same material are automatically combined for one PO item

If the assigned source was blocked after the assigment was made in the source list, it is not possible to convert the relevant requisition item

You can convert SA delivery schedule lines and contract release orders together

The source determination in a purchase requistion finds a source of supply is the next sequence: 1 Quota Arrangement; 2 Source List, 3 Outline Agreement, 4 Info Record. This is true or false

For which of the following transaction can the source of supply be determinated automatically?

Automatic purchase order generation for good receipt

Create pruchase order, vendor unknown

Create purchase order, venrdor know

You want to convert purchase requisitons into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

The release status describes which follow-on documents can be generated from purchase requisition

The aim of the release strategy is to control transmission of the requisition

You can have just 2 release strategys

The document type of the requisition determines whether the entire requisition is assigned to a release strategy or whether the release strategies are assigned on an item-wise basis

Manually, using the collective release

Manually, using the individual release

Automatically, when purchase requistion are converted into a purchase order

Manually, using the change purchase requisition transaction

Page 33: Material de Referencia MM

Consultar en N Question ANSWER1 2 3 4 5

90 40 30 20 10

91

92 which of the following are solution Manager Usage scenarios? Monitor SAP support Desk Implement SAP Solution Upgrade SAP solution Manage Change requests not all above

93

94 Solution Monitoring consists of the which tree components SAP service marketplace Business process Monitoring Service level reporting Business process repository System monitoring

95 Configuring the system Developping training materials end user training Defining the project scope

96 What are the five phases of the implementation roadmap?

97 Which the following statements applies to the enterprise portal

98 What is SAP ERP

99 Troubleshooting Management of SAP notes SAP HELP

TSCM50 1-A, pag 348 a 352 100 vendor material Delivery date plant Quantity

TSCM50 1-A, pag 348 a 352 101

102 one any number three two

TSCM50 1-A, figure 4 103 Which statements about the subcontracting process are correct

A release stategy for a purchase reqisition is defined as follows: Account aassigment category (blank), Plant (1000 or 1100) purchasing group (001), Material (m-01), Valutaion price (>200), quantity (>50). For next lines:

Item 10, AAC (blank), material =m-01, quantity 1, plant (1000), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

Item 20, AAC (blank), material =m-01, quantity 100, plant (1000), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

Item 30, AAC (K), material =m-01, quantity 100, plant (1100), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

Item 40, AAC (blank), material =m-01, quantity 1, plant (1200), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

For which purchase requisition item will this stategy be determinated?

Which of the following statements about SAP solution Manager is correct

Solution Manger is installed as component of each of your existing landscape

solution Manager is add-on industry solution

Solution manager is used only for implementing you aplication

Which of the following statements best describes the purpose of the SAP Solution Manager

To provide the tools, content and service to implement, operate, monitor and support the SAP Solution

To provide the tools and content to support the functional and technical implementation of your SAP solutions

To provide the tools to support the implementation and setup of operations of your SAP solutions

To provide the tools and service to support the operations in all available SAP solution

Which of the following activites would occur in phase 3? Select the correct answers

testing the system to ensure that it meets the specified business requirements

Project preparation, configuration blue print, realization, final publish, go live and support

Project prepartion, busines blueprint, realization, final preparation, go live and support

Project kick off, configuration blueprint, realizatión, final preparation, support

Project Kick off, business blueprint, realization final preparation, support

The portal is an interface for managing variants of frecuently used transaction

The portal buffers all data so that work continue in the portal

the portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different system

The portal is a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data

SAP ERP is a planing system in which enhanced planning processes can be represented

SAP ERP is a Technology platform that can be used as a basis for implementing customer specific enhacements

SAP ERP is a system that contains components for purchasing, sales, materials, management production an so on

SAP ERP is aplication that company can use to manage its business processes efficiently

SAP Solution Manager contains the service desk funtion. What funtion does the service desk provide?

Process for menssage processing

Which of the following do you enter when you create a blanket purchase order

What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparation with standart purchase order

invoice for a blanket purchase order are always blocked by the system

Blanket Purchase order item can have multiple account assigment

Blanket purchase order allows non-valuated good receipts only

Blanquet purchase orders items require an account assigment to be entered

In the feature, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N

You must set the especial stock indicator O in the purchase order

You order material for a customer, which is then delivered directly to de customer by the vendor

The vendor must be entered in the material master record as an eligible manufacturer

The vendor must be entered inthe BOM as an eligible manufacturer

Inthe purchase order, use item category L

Page 34: Material de Referencia MM

Consultar en N Question ANSWER1 2 3 4 5

TSCM50 1-A, figure 4 104 what features do the subcontracting order have?

105 Which operations are periodic invoincing plans suitable for? Rental payments magazine subcriptions electricity bills Credit card settlements

106 Which attributes do invoicing plans have?

107

108 Consumption account Price difference account GR/IR Clearing account stock account

109 General modification Posting Key Credit / Debit Valuation Modification

110 Yes No

111 Verdadero FALSE

112 Valuation class Account grouping code Item category Valuation Grouping code Transaction

113 Verdadero FALSE

114 Verdadero FALSE

TSCM50 1-A figure 73 115 any valuation classes

For subcontracting order an invoice receipt is binding

At leas one component must be provided to the subcontractor

Subcontracting orders may not have a and account assigment

the goods receipt for subcontracting order must always be posted as valuated

The price in the purcharse orders contain the service provided by the supplier

Invoice can be generated automatically

Invoicing Plans can be used for stock materials as well as for consumable material

The invoicing plan type for a purcharse order item can be changed retroactively

The start date of an invoicing plan can be defined at item level

TSCM50 1-A figure 75TSCM50 1-A Figure 86

TSCM50 1-A, Figure 106TSCM50 1-A, pag 309

what are characteristitics of material valuation at the moving averange price?

The moving averange price is equal to the total value multipled by total quantity of stock

If a purchase requisition is created, the current average price is proposed as the valuated price

Price difference posting can happen when posting an invoice receipt

Goods receipts are always valuated based on the moving average price from the material master record

TSCM50 1-A figure 103TSCM50 1-A figure 115

TSCM50 1-A , figure 115, 116 y 117

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purcharse order. The material has the material master record and account assigment category = K (cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L account were the posting made??Which rules you can be selected in account determination for Inventory postingDoes the movement type with which a goods receipt is recorded have any influence on the G/L accounts of the GR postingAccount determination always takes place on a plant dependent basisMention what are the principal and direct factor to determine the automatic account determinationTo be able to use production planning (component PP) material valuation must be set up at company code levelValue strings can be changed and extended en each company according to particular requirements

Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials

All valuaion classes of the calculation grouping code of the used valuation area

The default valuation class from the user parameters

All valuation classes from the account category reference assigned to the material type

Page 35: Material de Referencia MM

Calif

1

111

11

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Page 36: Material de Referencia MM

Calif

1

1

11

0

11

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Page 37: Material de Referencia MM

Calif

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

11

1

1

1

1

1

1

Page 38: Material de Referencia MM

Calif

1

1

1

1

1

11

1

0

1

1

11

1

0

11

Page 39: Material de Referencia MM

Calif

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Page 40: Material de Referencia MM

Calif

1

11

11

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Page 41: Material de Referencia MM

Calif

11

1

1

1

1

11

1

1

1

1109 95%115 100%

Page 42: Material de Referencia MM

Test Number Question

80 1

80 1

80 1

80 180 1 D. The interval of the number assignment (internal or external)

80 1

80 280 2 A. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple company codes

80 2 B. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple controlling areas

80 2 C. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple plants

80 2 D. Multiple purchasing groups can be assigned to a purchasing organization

80 3 3.Which field attribute is given the highest priority in the field selection control?

80 3 A. Optional field

80 3 B. Required entry field+

80 3 C. Suppress

80 3 D. Display

80 4 4.At what level can you set quantity and value updating on a material type?

80 4 A. Plant

80 4 B. Company code

80 4 C. Valuation area

80 4 D. Procurement type

80 5

80 5

80 5

80 5

80 5

80 6

1.What does an account group determine when vendor master records are created? (Choose three.) A. The number range in which a vendor master record must be created for this account group B. The default setting of the info update indicator in purchase orders for vendors in this account group C. The field selection when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

E. The sequence of tab pages when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group 2.Which assignment can be made for the organizational object "purchasing organization".?

5.You procure a material using the "Consignment" process. You want to ensure that purchase requisitions with the "Consignment" item category are generated automatically for requirements in requirements planning. Which of the following settings allows you to do this? (Choose two.)

A. Enter "Consignment" as the special procurement type in the material master record. B. Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and enter it as a fixed source of supply in the source list. C. Activate the quota arrangement for the relevant material and create a quota arrangement item using "Consignment" as the special procurement type. D. Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and select the "Regular Vendor" indicator in the record. 6.Your company manages stock of various advertising articles on a quantity and value basis. In the future, you want to analyze the value of these advertising articles. Unfortunately, the articles have been created with different material types, material groups, valuation classes, and in different number range intervals. For this reason, you want to change the assignments. Which of the following changes are possible, even if stock exists for the articles?

Page 43: Material de Referencia MM

80 6

80 6

80 6

80 6

80 780 7 Which of the following settings can you define in a confirmation control key?

80 780 7 B. Confirmations must be transmitted electronically.

80 780 7 D. The full confirmed quantity must be entered in one posting in the system.

80 8

80 880 8 B. Value contract for material 4711

80 8

80 880 9 9.From which stock type can goods issues to cost centers be posted?

80 9 A. Non-valuated blocked stock

80 9 B. Valuated blocked stock

80 9 C. Quality inspection stock

80 9 D. Unrestricted-use stock

80 10 10.What is mandatory in a purchase order for a non-valuated material?

80 10 A. Set the indicator for goods receipt.

80 1080 10 C. Set the indicator for non-valuated goods receipts.

80 10 D. Set the indicator for invoice receipt.

80 1180 11 A. Warehouse stock

80 11 B. On-order stock

80 11 C. Reorder point

80 11 D. Non-valuated goods receipt blocked stock

80 11 E. Fixed purchase requisitions

80 1280 12 A. Withdrawal for scrapping

80 12 B. Withdrawal for inspection sample

A. You create a new material group and then change the material group of the advertising articles to the new material group. B. You create a new material type and then change the material type of the advertising articles to the new material type. C. You create a new valuation class and then change the valuation class of the advertising articles to the new valuation class. D. You create a new number range interval and then change the material numbers of the advertising articles to a number in the new number range interval. 7.Before deliveries arrive from certain vendors, you want to be informed of the delivery date and quantity. To do this, you use a confirmation control key.

A. Only the confirmed quantity can be posted when the goods are received.

C. The goods receipt can be posted no earlier than the confirmed delivery date.

8.For a material without a material master record, a source of supply is to be found when a purchase requisition is created. You request 10 pallets of copier paper belonging to material group 4711. Which of the following sources of supply is proposed by the system?

A. Value contract with item category W (material group) for articles of material group 4711

C. SRM central contract with item category M (material unknown) for 100 tons of copier paper of material group 4711 D. Quantity contract for over 500 pallets of copier paper for a stock material that belongs to material group 4711

B. Select an account assignment category and assign an account assignment object.

11.Which of the following elements belong to warehouse stock available for MRP in net requirement calculation? (Choose three.)

12.You want to post a goods issue from stock in quality inspection. In which of the following cases is this possible? (Choose two.)

Page 44: Material de Referencia MM

80 12 C. Withdrawal for a reservation

80 12 D. Withdrawal for a cost center

80 1380 13 A. Goods receipt for initial stock entry

80 13 B. Goods receipt to the stock of material provided to vendor

80 13 C. Goods receipt for a free-of-charge delivery

80 13 D. Goods receipt to the consignment stock

80 14 14.What can you define for a movement type in Customizing? (Choose two.)

80 14 A. The transactions in which a movement type can be used

80 14 B. The reversal movement types for a movement type

80 14 C. The quantity and value updates for postings with a movement type

80 14

80 1580 15 A. The materials being transferred must have the same valuation class.

80 15 B. The materials being transferred must have the same material type.

80 15 C. The materials being transferred must have the same material group.

80 15 D. The materials being transferred must have the same base unit of measure.

80 1680 16 A. Transfer postings from GR blocked stock to unrestricted-use stock

80 16 B. Transfer postings between plants that have the same company code

80 16 C. Transfer postings from unrestricted-use stock to quality inspection stock

80 16

80 1780 17

80 17

80 17

80 1780 18 18.What can be triggered by a goods receipt posting? (Choose three.)

80 18 A. The buyer receives a message about the goods received.

80 18

80 1880 18 D. Labels are printed.

80 18 E. The MRP controller receives a message about overdeliveries.

80 1980 19 A. Cost center

13.In which of the following cases is the goods receipt always posted as non-valuated?

D. The number range for material documents that are generated when postings are made with a movement type 15.Which of the following is a prerequisite for transfer postings between two materials ("material to material")?

16.For which transfer postings can an accounting document be generated if the postings are made with a valuated material? (Choose two.)

D. Transfer postings between two storage locations of one plant based on a two-step procedure 17.You transfer material between two plants. During the transport process, some parts are damaged so badly that they have to be scrapped. How you can you post this as scrapping? (Choose two.)

A. You reverse the stock removal in the issuing plant and post the scrapping there. B. You put away the entire quantity in the receiving plant and post the scrapping there. C. You adjust the stock in transit and put away the remaining quantity in the receiving plant. D. You put away the entire quantity in the receiving plant, where you immediately carry out a physical inventory of the material.

B. The requisitioner of a referenced purchase requisition receives a message about the goods received. C. For stock material, the total quantity and total value are recalculated in the material master record.

19.For which of the following objects can you post a goods issue directly from the valuated stock using a standard movement type? (Choose three.)

Page 45: Material de Referencia MM

80 19 B. Profit center

80 19 C. Production order

80 19 D. Project (= WBS element)

80 19 E. Work center

80 20 20.What can be changed in a material document after it has been posted?

80 20 A. The vendor delivery note number in the document header

80 20 B. The quantity at item level

80 20 C. The stock type at item level

80 20 D. The text at item level

80 2180 21 A. The material affected must be valuated based on the standard price.

80 21 B. The material affected must be valuated based on the moving average price.

80 21

80 21

80 2280 22 A. Switch to document parking and then save the invoice.

80 22

80 22

80 2280 23 23.What does the document type control when an invoice is entered? (Choose two.)

80 23 A. The number assignment (number range interval) for the invoice document

80 2380 23 C. Whether the invoice is posted as gross or net

80 23 D. Whether the invoice is blocked for payment when posted

80 2480 24 A. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a price difference account.

80 2480 24 C. The unplanned delivery costs are to be split across the invoice items.

80 24

80 2580 25 A. Posting date

80 25 B. Reference

21.You post an invoice with unplanned delivery costs. These costs should be posted in full to the stock account of a material. What prerequisites must be met to achieve this? (Choose two.)

C. Stock of the affected material must be available at least in the invoiced quantity. D. In the invoice header, you have to enter the stock account to which the unplanned delivery costs are to be posted. 22.You receive an invoice from a vendor for a material to the amount of EUR 1,000 for 100 pieces. After you have entered the header data and the purchase order number, the system proposes a quantity of 70 pieces and an amount of EUR 700 from the goods receipt postings. How can you enter the invoice in the system without it being blocked for payment? (Choose two.)

B. Define a tolerance group in the vendor master record of the relevant vendor before posting, so that the invoice is then reduced automatically when posted. C. Use the manual invoice reduction, select the "Vendor Error: Reduce Invoice" option, and enter the quantity and value invoiced by the vendor next to the quantity and value proposed.

D. Before posting the invoice, you change the payment block indicator in the invoice header to "Released for Payment".

B. The number assignment (number range interval) for the accounting document

24.Which two options can you define in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification to manage unplanned delivery costs for invoice receipts? (Choose two.)

B. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a separate G/L account for unplanned delivery costs.

D. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a specific cost center. Answer: B,C 25.Which fields can you include in the check for duplicate invoices in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

Page 46: Material de Referencia MM

80 25 C. Invoice date

80 25 D. Terms of payment

80 2680 26 A. The vendor has invoiced a price higher than the purchase order price.

80 26 B. You have posted an invoice incorrectly and canceled it afterwards.

80 2680 26 D. The vendor has invoiced a price lower than the purchase order price.

80 27

80 27

80 27

80 27

80 27

80 2880 28 A. A material document

80 28 B. A service entry sheet

80 28 C. A vendor delivery note

80 28 D. A different invoice from the vendor

80 2980 29 A. The invoice was blocked stochastically.

80 29

80 29

80 29

80 3080 30 A. 100%

80 30 B. 75%

80 30 C. 67.5%

80 30 D. 50%

80 3180 31 A. The system generates a subsequent debit.

80 31 B. The system generates a credit memo.

80 31 C. G/L accounts will be newly determined.

80 31 D. The system deletes the original invoice document.

80 32

26.In which of the following cases do you have to maintain GR/IR clearing accounts in Logistics Invoice Verification?

C. For an item that has been delivered, a higher quantity was invoiced than delivered.

27.In which of the following cases do you have to enter a subsequent debit in Logistics Invoice Verification? A. The vendor invoices a quantity higher than delivered for a purchase order item in which goods-receipt-based invoice verification is flagged. B. You receive an invoice in foreign currency and the current exchange rate is higher than the rate specified in the purchase order. C. You receive an invoice from a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery costs related to a purchase order item already invoiced. D. You receive an invoice from a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery costs related to a delivery completed purchase order. 28.With reference to which of the following objects can you enter an invoice in Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

29.In which of the following cases can invoices be released automatically? (Choose two.)

B. The invoice was blocked due to a price variance, and the buyer has now changed the price in the purchase order to the invoice price. C. The invoice was blocked manually because the invoice price was lower than the order price, and the buyer has now changed the price in the purchase order to the invoice price. D. The invoice was blocked on the entry date due to date variance. The current date is identical to the delivery date of the order item for which the invoice was blocked. 30.In Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification, the following values are defined for the stochastic block: Threshold value. 10000 Percentage. 50 You enter an invoice with a value of 15000. What is the probability that the invoice will be blocked stochastically?

31.What happens when you cancel invoices in Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

32.In Logistics Invoice Verification, from where does the system determine the terms of payment for invoices without a purchase order reference?

Page 47: Material de Referencia MM

80 32 A. From the last invoice for the vendor.

80 32 B. From the purchasing data in the vendor master record.

80 32 C. From the accounting data in the vendor master record.

80 32 D. From the first entry in the Customizing table for terms of payment.

80 3380 33 A. Material Requirements Planning

80 33 B. Purchasing

80 33 C. Accounting

80 33 D. Basic Data

80 33 E. Forecasting

80 3480 34 A. Plant

80 34 B. Vendor subrange

80 34 C. Partner schema

80 34 D. Partner role

80 3580 35 A. Client

80 35 B. Company code

80 35 C. Plant

80 35 D. Purchasing organization

80 36 36.Which assignment can be made for the organizational object "plant"?

80 36 A. A plant can be assigned directly to one controlling area.

80 36 B. A plant can be assigned to several company codes.

80 36 C. A plant can be assigned to a reference purchasing organization.

80 36 D. A plant can be assigned to exactly one company code.

80 3780 37 A. Planned orders

80 37 B. Purchase requisitions

80 37 C. Schedule lines

80 37 D. Purchase orders

80 37 E. Production orders

80 38 38.What can an MRP area include? (Choose three.)

80 38 A. One plant

80 38 B. Multiple plants

80 38 C. Multiple storage locations of a plant

80 38 D. One subcontractor

80 38 E. Multiple subcontractors

80 3980 39 A. Purchasing processing time

33.You can use profiles to help you enter data in material master records. For which user departments are profiles available? (Choose two.)

34.At what level in the vendor master record is it possible to define purchasing data that is different from that which is maintained at the purchasing organization level? (Choose two.)

35.For which organizational levels can you maintain the material status in material master records? (Choose two.)

37.Which procurement elements can be generated in the material requirements planning run for a material that is procured only externally? (Choose three.)

39.Which times belong to the replenishment lead time in the planning run for an externally procured material? (Choose three.)

Page 48: Material de Referencia MM

80 39 B. Planned delivery time

80 39 C. Requirement lead time

80 39 D. Goods receipt processing time

80 39 E. Minimum remaining shelf life

80 4080 40 A. Procurement type

80 40 B. Exception message

80 40 C. MRP type

80 40 D. MRP controller

80 41

80 41

80 41

80 41

80 41

80 4280 42 A. Count status

80 42 B. Adjustment status

80 42 C. Delete status

80 42 D. Physical inventory status

80 42 E. Material status

80 43 43.What data is displayed in the list of inventory differences? (Choose three.)

80 43 A. Book quantity

80 43 B. Quantity counted

80 43 C. Difference quantity

80 43 D. Current plant stock

80 43 E. Date on which the difference is to be posted

80 4480 44 A. Maximum difference amount for each Physical Inventory document

80 44 B. Maximum difference amount for each Physical Inventory document item

80 44 C. Maximum percentage value variance for each Physical Inventory document item

80 44 D. Maximum difference amount for each storage location

80 44 E. Maximum quantity variance for each Physical Inventory document item

80 45

40.You perform a total planning run for a plant. On the initial screen, you can select a creation indicator for MRP lists. Which of the following can determine whether an MRP list is created for a material?

41.During a physical inventory, the warehouse manager has decided to have the quantity of a material recounted for a physical inventory document. How is a recount processed in the system?

A. The new count quantity is entered in the existing physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted. B. A new physical inventory document is created. The new count quantity is entered. When the inventory difference is now posted, all physical inventory documents still to be posted for the material affected are deleted.

C. A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. After the recount, the inventory difference for the old document is posted first, followed by the inventory difference for the new document.

D. A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. The new count quantity is entered in the new physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted.

42.Which statuses are updated at header level in a physical inventory document? (Choose three.)

44.For posting inventory differences, you can define tolerance groups. What tolerances can you define? (Choose two.)

45.What special features apply to purchase orders of services (item category D)? (Choose two.)

Page 49: Material de Referencia MM

80 45 A. Unknown account assignment is allowed.

80 45 B. The price can be determined from the service conditions.

80 45 C. All service lines must have the same account assignment.

80 45

80 46

80 46

80 4680 46 C. Yes, you can create the purchase order regardless of the rejection indicator.

80 46 D. No, you have to maintain a new quotation first.

80 4780 47 A. Scope of list

80 47 B. Selection parameter

80 47 C. Layout

80 47 D. Breakdown

80 48 48.What can you use to determine the origin of a purchase requisition?

80 48 A. Requester

80 48 B. Creation indicator

80 48 C. MRP controller

80 48 D. Processing status

80 4980 49 A. Breakdown

80 49 B. Layout

80 49 C. Personal settings for the transaction

80 49 D. Default values in Customizing

80 5080 50 A. Purchasing

80 50 B. Accounting

80 50 C. General Plant Data/Storage

80 50 D. Basic Data

80 5180 51 A. In the language in which you are logged on to the system

80 51 B. In the language defined in the vendor master record

80 51 C. In the language of the purchase order header

80 51 D. In the language defined in the output determination Customizing settings

80 52

D. When the service entry sheet is created only services contained in the purchase order can be entered. 46.You have set the rejection indicator in a quotation item. Can you still create a purchase order with reference to this quotation item? A. No, a quotation item for which the rejection indicator is set cannot be converted into a purchase order. B. Yes, but you have to enter the price in the purchase order manually since it is not copied from the quotation in this case.

47.You want to create a list of all purchase orders for which you have not yet received an invoice. What can you use to find these specific purchase orders when entering your criteria for the search query?

49.You set up the document overview in the Enjoy SAP purchase order (transaction ME21N). What setting allows you to sort documents by vendor first and then by document number within a vendor?

50.You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum? (Choose two.)

51.You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?

52.Which procurement element can be created in Purchasing with automatic purchase order generation?

Page 50: Material de Referencia MM

80 52 A. Delivery schedules

80 52 B. Contracts

80 52 C. Invoicing plans

80 52 D. Contract release orders

80 53 53.What characterizes an item category in purchasing? (Choose two.)

80 53 A. New item categories can be created in Customizing.

80 53

80 5380 53 D. The name of an item category can be changed in Customizing.

80 54 54.Which settings can be made for account assignment categories? (Choose two.)

80 54

80 54

80 5480 54 D. New account assignment categories can be created in Customizing.

80 5580 55 A. In purchasing info records

80 55 B. In contracts

80 55 C. In purchase orders

80 55 D. In scheduling agreements

80 56 56.What advantage does the collective number have in requests for quotations?

80 56

80 56

80 56

80 56

80 5780 57 A. The purchase orders that you recently created

80 57 B. The purchase orders found by the system in the last document search

80 57 C. The purchase orders for which you last posted goods receipts

80 57 D. The purchase orders with today's date as the delivery date

80 5880 58 A. Purchase order item of the category "Limit".

80 58

80 58

B. The item category contains a default value for the invoice receipt indicator in a purchase order item. C. Any item category can be used in combination with any account assignment category in a purchase order.

A. The field selection for all fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category. B. The field selection for the account assignment fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category. C. The field selection for all fields of the purchase order header can be defined based on the account assignment category.

55.Where are only time-independent conditions defined for the procurement process?

A. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for message output of requests for quotations. B. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating info records from quotations. C. The collective number makes it easier to select quotation documents for the price comparison. D. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating source list entries from quotations. 57.In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the "My documents" overview. Which documents are displayed under "Purchase Orders"?

58.You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are selected while others are not. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system? (Choose two.)

B. Valuated goods receipt for a purchase order item with a purchase order quantity of 100 pieces. Previous goods movements: Goods receipt of 80 pieces and return delivery to the vendor of 75 pieces.

C. Purchase order item for which a goods receipt was posted to non-valuated GR blocked stock.

Page 51: Material de Referencia MM

80 58

80 5980 59 A. Whether blocked invoices exist for a purchase order item

80 5980 59 C. The total of open items for a vendor in the current invoice

80 59 D. Whether there were return deliveries for a purchase order item

80 59 E. Whether there is a different invoicing party in the purchase order for this invoice

80 6080 60 A. EUR 1,045

80 60 B. EUR 1,026

80 60 C. EUR 1,055

80 60 D. EUR 1,050

80 6180 61 A. Source determination

80 61 B. Price determination

80 61 C. Message determination

80 61 D. Partner determination

80 62 62.Where can you maintain the regular vendor?

80 62 A. In the source list at plant level

80 62 B. In the info record at client level

80 62 C. In the quota arrangement

80 62 D. In the info record at purchasing organization level

80 6380 63 A. 10

80 63 B. 20

80 63 C. 30

80 63 D. 40

80 6480 6480 64 B. Outline agreement number for external procurement requirements

80 64 C. Vendor for external procurement requirements

80 64 D. Info record number for external procurement requirements

80 6580 65 A. When creating info records

80 65 B. When creating contracts

80 65 C. Using the Mass Maintenance Tool

D. Purchase order item with account assignment, for which a goods receipt is not planned. 59.What can you derive from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (Enter Invoice)? (Choose two.)

B. Whether the goods receipt for a purchase order item was posted as valuated or non-valuated

60.A vendor offers you a material at the gross price of EUR 1,000. In addition, the vendor gives you a 10% discount and a 5% cash discount. The vendor charges EUR 200 for freight costs. What is the effective price if you use the calculation schema below?

61.You want to convert purchase requisitions into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

63.A release strategy for purchase requisition is defined as follows: -Account Assignment Category " " (blank) -Plant 1000 or 1100 -Purchasing Group 001 =- Item value. > 1000 For which purchase requisition item (see graphic) will this strategy be determined?

64.What information can you specify in a quota arrangement? (Choose two.)

A. Plant from which material is procured for stock transfer requirements

65.Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries? (Choose two.)

Page 52: Material de Referencia MM

80 65 D. When creating a purchase order

80 6680 66 A. The moving average price of the material is recalculated.

80 66

80 6680 66

80 6780 67 A. Create reservation

80 67 B. Create purchase order, vendor known

80 67 C. Create purchase order, vendor unknown

80 67 D. Create purchase requisition

80 67 E. Automatic purchase order generation for goods receipt

80 68 68.How can blocked purchase requisitions be released? (Choose two.)

80 68 A. Manually, using individual release

80 68 B. Manually, using the "Change Purchase Requisition" transaction

80 68 C. Manually, using collective release

80 68 D. Automatically, when purchase requisitions are converted into purchase orders

80 6980 69 A. GR/IR clearing account

80 69 B. Consumption account

80 69 C. Stock account

80 69 D. Price difference account

80 7080 70 A. Price difference postings can happen when posting an invoice receipt

80 70

80 70

80 70

80 71

80 7180 71 B. Any valuation class.

80 71 C. All valuation classes of the valuation grouping code of the used valuation area.

80 71 D. The default valuation class from the user parameters.

66.You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that are open for delivery from the relevant vendor. What happens when the price is changed in the info record?

B. The new price is immediately proposed for all new purchase orders created for the relevant material with the respective vendor. C. The PO price in the purchase orders that are still open is automatically changed to the new price. D. Invoice verification automatically receives a message about the price change made. 67.For which of the following transactions can the source of supply be determined automatically? (Choose two.)

69.You post a valuated goods receipt for a purchase order. The material has a material master record and a material type for which quantity and value are updated. The purchase order item has the account assignment category K (= cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L accounts were the postings made? (Choose two.)

70.What are characteristics of material valuation at the moving average price? (Choose two.)

B. Goods receipts are always valuated based on the moving average price from the material master record C. The moving average price is equal to the total value multiplied by total quantity of stock D. If a purchase requisition is created, the current moving average price is proposed as the valuation price 71.Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials? A. All valuation classes from the account category reference assigned to the material type.

Page 53: Material de Referencia MM

80 7280 72 A. General modification

80 72 B. Credit/Debit

80 72 C. Valuation modification

80 72 D. Posting key

80 73 73.Which of the following statements about SAP Solution Manager is correct?

80 73

80 7380 73 C. SAP Solution Manager is used only for implementing your application.

80 73 D. SAP Solution Manager is an add-on industry solution.

80 7480 74 A. Process for message processing

80 74 B. Management of SAP Notes

80 74 C. SAP Help

80 74 D. Troubleshooting

80 75 75.What is "SAP ERP"?

80 75

80 75

80 75

80 7580 76 76.Which of the following statements applies to the Enterprise Portal?

80 76

80 76

80 76

80 76

80 7780 77 A. Blanket purchase orders allow non-valuated goods receipts only.

80 77 B. Blanket purchase order items require an account assignment to be entered.

80 77 C. Blanket purchase orders items can have multiple account assignment.

80 77 D. Invoices for blanket purchase orders are always blocked by the system.

80 78 78.What features do subcontracting orders (item category L) have? (Choose two.)

80 7880 78 B. At least one component must be provided to the subcontractor.

80 78 C. Subcontracting orders may not have an account assignment.

72.Which rule can be selected in account determination for Inventory postings (Transaction BSX)?

A. SAP Solution Manager is a standalone system that communicates with the systems in the system landscape. B. SAP Solution Manager is installed as a component of each of your existing landscapes.

74.SAP Solution Manager contains the Service Desk function. What functions does the Service Desk provide? (Choose two.)

A. SAP ERP is an application that a company can use to manage its business processes efficiently. B. SAP ERP is a system that contains components for purchasing, sales, materials management, production, and so on. C. SAP ERP is a planning system in which enhanced planning processes can be represented. D. SAP ERP is a technology platform that can be used as a basis for implementing customer-specific enhancements.

A. The portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different systems. B. The portal is an interface for managing variants of frequently-used transactions. C. The portal is only a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data. D. The portal buffers all data so that work can continue in the portal if one of the assigned systems fails. 77.What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparison to a standard purchase order (standard item category)?

A. The goods receipt for a subcontracting order must always be posted as valuated.

Page 54: Material de Referencia MM

80 7880 78 E. For subcontracting orders, an invoice receipt is binding.

80 7980 79 A. Two

80 79 B. Three

80 79 C. One

80 79 D. Any number

80 80 80.Which attributes do invoicing plans have? (Choose two.)

80 80 A. Invoices for invoicing plans can be generated automatically.

80 80 B. The start date of an invoicing plan can be defined at item level.

80 8080 80 D. The invoicing plan type for a purchase order item can be changed retroactively.

D. The price in the purchase order contains both the service provided by the subcontractor and the value of the components.

79.In the future, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. To do this, they are to access catalogs directly from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N?

C. Invoicing plans can be used for stock materials as well as for consumable materials.

Page 55: Material de Referencia MM

Test Number Question

GA 1GA 1 A. Purchasing

GA 1 B. Accounting

GA 1 C. General Plant Data/Storage

GA 1 D. Basic Data

GA 2GA 2 A. In the language in which you are logged on to the system

GA 2 B. In the language defined in the vendor master record

GA 2 C. In the language of the purchase order header

GA 2 D. In the language defined in the output determination Customizing settings

GA 3GA 3 A. Delivery schedules

GA 3 B. Contracts

GA 3 C. Invoicing plans

GA 3 D. Contract release orders

GA 4 What characterizes an item category in purchasing? (Choose two.)

GA 4 A. New item categories can be created in Customizing.

GA 4

GA 4GA 4 D. The name of an item category can be changed in Customizing.

GA 5 hich settings can be made for account assignment categories? (Choose two.)

GA 5

GA 5

GA 5GA 5 D. New account assignment categories can be created in Customizing.

GA 6GA 6 A. In purchasing info records

GA 6 B. In contracts

GA 6 C. In purchase orders

GA 6 D. In scheduling agreements

GA 7 What advantage does the collective number have in requests for quotations?

GA 7

GA 7

GA 7

You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum? (Choose two.)

You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?

Which procurement element can be created in Purchasing with automatic purchase order generation?

B. The item category contains a default value for the invoice receipt indicator in a purchase order item. C. Any item category can be used in combination with any account assignment category in a purchase order.

A. The field selection for all fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category. B. The field selection for the account assignment fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category. C. The field selection for all fields of the purchase order header can be defined based on the account assignment category.

Where are only time-independent conditions defined for the procurement process?

A. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for message output of requests for quotations. B. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating info records from quotations. C. The collective number makes it easier to select quotation documents for the price comparison.

Page 56: Material de Referencia MM

GA 7

GA 8GA 8 A. The purchase orders that you recently created

GA 8 B. The purchase orders found by the system in the last document search

GA 8 C. The purchase orders for which you last posted goods receipts

GA 8 D. The purchase orders with today's date as the delivery date

GA 9GA 9 A. Purchase order item of the category "Limit".

GA 9

GA 9

GA 9

GA 10GA 10 A. Whether blocked invoices exist for a purchase order item

GA 10GA 10 C. The total of open items for a vendor in the current invoice

GA 10 D. Whether there were return deliveries for a purchase order item

GA 10

GA 11GA 11 A. EUR 1,045

GA 11 B. EUR 1,026

GA 11 C. EUR 1,055

GA 11 D. EUR 1,050

GA 12GA 12 A. Source determination

GA 12 B. Price determination

GA 12 C. Message determination

GA 12 D. Partner determination

GA 13 Where can you maintain the regular vendor?

GA 13 A. In the source list at plant level

GA 13 B. In the info record at client level

GA 13 C. In the quota arrangement

D. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating source list entries from quotations. In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the "My documents" overview. Which documents are displayed under "Purchase Orders"?

58.You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are selected while others are not. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system? (Choose two.)

B. Valuated goods receipt for a purchase order item with a purchase order quantity of 100 pieces. Previous goods movements: Goods receipt of 80 pieces and return delivery to the vendor of 75 pieces.

C. Purchase order item for which a goods receipt was posted to non-valuated GR blocked stock. D. Purchase order item with account assignment, for which a goods receipt is not planned. .What can you derive from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (Enter Invoice)? (Choose two.)

B. Whether the goods receipt for a purchase order item was posted as valuated or non-valuated

E. Whether there is a different invoicing party in the purchase order for this invoice .A vendor offers you a material at the gross price of EUR 1,000. In addition, the vendor gives you a 10% discount and a 5% cash discount. The vendor charges EUR 200 for freight costs. What is the effective price if you use the calculation schema below?

You want to convert purchase requisitions into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

Page 57: Material de Referencia MM

GA 13 D. In the info record at purchasing organization level

GA 14GA 14 A. 10

GA 14 B. 20

GA 14 C. 30

GA 14 D. 40

GA 15

GA 15GA 15 B. Outline agreement number for external procurement requirements

GA 15 C. Vendor for external procurement requirements

GA 15 D. Info record number for external procurement requirements

GA 16GA 16 A. When creating info records

GA 16 B. When creating contracts

GA 16 C. Using the Mass Maintenance Tool

GA 16 D. When creating a purchase order

GA 17GA 17 A. The moving average price of the material is recalculated.

GA 17

GA 17

GA 17

GA 18GA 18 A. Create reservation

GA 18 B. Create purchase order, vendor known

GA 18 C. Create purchase order, vendor unknown

GA 18 D. Create purchase requisition

GA 19GA 19 A. Manually, using individual release

GA 19 B. Manually, using the "Change Purchase Requisition" transaction

GA 19 C. Manually, using collective release

GA 19

.A release strategy for purchase requisition is defined as follows: Account Assignment Category " " (blank) -Plant 1000 or 1100 -Purchasing Group 001 =- Item value. > 1000 For which purchase requisition item (see graphic) will this strategy be determined?

.What information can you specify in a quota arrangement? (Choose two.) A. Plant from which material is procured for stock transfer requirements

Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries? (Choose two.)

You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that are open for delivery from the relevant vendor. What happens when the price is changed in the info record?

B. The new price is immediately proposed for all new purchase orders created for the relevant material with the respective vendor. C. The PO price in the purchase orders that are still open is automatically changed to the new price. D. Invoice verification automatically receives a message about the price change made. For which of the following transactions can the source of supply be determined automatically? (Choose two.)

E. Automatic purchase order generation for goods receipt .How can blocked purchase requisitions be released? (Choose two.)

D. Automatically, when purchase requisitions are converted into purchase orders

Page 58: Material de Referencia MM

GA 20GA 20 A. GR/IR clearing account

GA 20 B. Consumption account

GA 20 C. Stock account

GA 20 D. Price difference account

GA 21GA 21 A. Price difference postings can happen when posting an invoice receipt

GA 21

GA 21

GA 21

GA 22

GA 22GA 22 B. Any valuation class.

GA 22GA 22 D. The default valuation class from the user parameters.

GA 23GA 23 A. General modification

GA 23 B. Credit/Debit

GA 23 C. Valuation modification

GA 23 D. Posting key

GA 24 .Which of the following statements about SAP Solution Manager is correct?

GA 24

GA 24GA 24 C. SAP Solution Manager is used only for implementing your application.

GA 24 D. SAP Solution Manager is an add-on industry solution.

GA 25GA 25 A. Process for message processing

GA 25 B. Management of SAP Notes

GA 25 C. SAP Help

GA 25 D. Troubleshooting

GA 26 What is "SAP ERP"?

GA 26

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purchase order. The material has a material master record and a material type for which quantity and value are updated. The purchase order item has the account assignment category K (= cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L accounts were the postings made? (Choose two.)

.What are characteristics of material valuation at the moving average price? (Choose two.)

B. Goods receipts are always valuated based on the moving average price from the material master record C. The moving average price is equal to the total value multiplied by total quantity of stock D. If a purchase requisition is created, the current moving average price is proposed as the valuation price .Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials? A. All valuation classes from the account category reference assigned to the material type.

C. All valuation classes of the valuation grouping code of the used valuation area.

Which rule can be selected in account determination for Inventory postings (Transaction BSX)?

A. SAP Solution Manager is a standalone system that communicates with the systems in the system landscape. B. SAP Solution Manager is installed as a component of each of your existing landscapes.

SAP Solution Manager contains the Service Desk function. What functions does the Service Desk provide? (Choose two.)

A. SAP ERP is an application that a company can use to manage its business processes efficiently.

Page 59: Material de Referencia MM

GA 26

GA 26

GA 26GA 27 .Which of the following statements applies to the Enterprise Portal?

GA 27GA 27

GA 27

GA 27

GA 28GA 28 A. Blanket purchase orders allow non-valuated goods receipts only.

GA 28GA 28 C. Blanket purchase orders items can have multiple account assignment.

GA 28 D. Invoices for blanket purchase orders are always blocked by the system.

GA 29 What features do subcontracting orders (item category L) have? (Choose two.)

GA 29GA 29 B. At least one component must be provided to the subcontractor.

GA 29 C. Subcontracting orders may not have an account assignment.

GA 29GA 29 E. For subcontracting orders, an invoice receipt is binding.

GA 30GA 30 A. Two

GA 30 B. Three

GA 30 C. One

GA 30 D. Any number

GA 31 Which attributes do invoicing plans have? (Choose two.)

GA 31 A. Invoices for invoicing plans can be generated automatically.

GA 31 B. The start date of an invoicing plan can be defined at item level.

GA 31GA 31

B. SAP ERP is a system that contains components for purchasing, sales, materials management, production, and so on. C. SAP ERP is a planning system in which enhanced planning processes can be represented. D. SAP ERP is a technology platform that can be used as a basis for implementing customer-specific enhancements.

A. The portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different systems. B. The portal is an interface for managing variants of frequently-used transactions. C. The portal is only a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data. D. The portal buffers all data so that work can continue in the portal if one of the assigned systems fails.

What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparison to a standard purchase order (standard item category)?

B. Blanket purchase order items require an account assignment to be entered.

A. The goods receipt for a subcontracting order must always be posted as valuated.

D. The price in the purchase order contains both the service provided by the subcontractor and the value of the components.

In the future, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. To do this, they are to access catalogs directly from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N?

C. Invoicing plans can be used for stock materials as well as for consumable materials. D. The invoicing plan type for a purchase order item can be changed retroactively.

Page 60: Material de Referencia MM

Material Q $A 150 4

Gross price 1000 B 20 45Absolute Discount 10%

100Net Price 900Freigh 200Cash discount 1100

5%45

Effective Price 1055

Page 61: Material de Referencia MM

Total $ % Freigh ChargesCustom Duty Total cargos % por mat600 0.4 825 125 950 380900 0.6 570

1500 950

Page 62: Material de Referencia MM

Test Number

80 180 180 180 180 180 180 280 280 280 280 280 380 380 380 380 380 480 480 480 480 4

80 580 580 5

80 580 5

80 6

Page 63: Material de Referencia MM

80 6

80 6

80 6

80 6

80 780 780 780 780 7

80 880 880 880 880 880 980 980 980 980 980 1080 1080 1080 1080 10

80 1180 1180 1180 1180 1180 11

80 1280 1280 1280 1280 1280 1380 13

Page 64: Material de Referencia MM

80 1380 1380 1380 1480 1480 1480 1480 1480 1580 1580 1580 1580 15

80 1680 1680 1680 1680 16

80 1780 1780 1780 17

80 1780 1880 1880 18

80 1880 1880 18

80 1980 1980 1980 1980 1980 1980 2080 2080 2080 20

Page 65: Material de Referencia MM

80 20

80 2180 2180 2180 2180 21

80 2280 22

80 22

80 22

80 2280 2380 2380 2380 2380 23

80 2480 2480 2480 2480 24

80 2580 2580 2580 2580 2580 2680 2680 2680 2680 2680 27

80 27

80 27

80 27

Page 66: Material de Referencia MM

80 27

80 2880 2880 2880 2880 2880 2980 29

80 29

80 29

80 29

80 3080 3080 3080 3080 3080 3180 3180 3180 3180 31

80 3280 3280 3280 3280 32

80 3380 3380 3380 3380 3380 33

80 3480 3480 3480 34

Page 67: Material de Referencia MM

80 3480 3580 3580 3580 3580 3580 3680 3680 3680 3680 36

80 3780 3780 3780 3780 3780 3780 3880 3880 3880 3880 3880 38

80 3980 3980 3980 3980 3980 39

80 4080 4080 4080 4080 40

80 41

80 41

80 41

80 41

Page 68: Material de Referencia MM

80 4180 4280 4280 4280 4280 4280 4280 4380 4380 4380 4380 4380 4380 4480 4480 4480 4480 4480 4480 4580 4580 4580 4580 45

80 4680 46

80 4680 4680 46

80 4780 4780 4780 4780 4780 4880 4880 4880 4880 48

Page 69: Material de Referencia MM

80 4980 4980 4980 4980 49

80 5080 5080 5080 5080 5080 5180 5180 5180 5180 5180 5280 5280 5280 5280 5280 5380 5380 5380 5380 5380 54

80 54

80 54

80 5480 5480 5580 5580 5580 5580 5580 56

80 5680 5680 56

Page 70: Material de Referencia MM

80 56

80 5780 5780 5780 5780 57

80 5880 58

80 5880 5880 58

80 5980 5980 5980 5980 5980 59

80 6080 6080 6080 6080 60

80 6180 6180 6180 6180 6180 6280 6280 6280 6280 62

80 6380 6380 6380 6380 63

Page 71: Material de Referencia MM

80 6480 6480 6480 6480 6480 6580 6580 6580 6580 65

80 6680 66

80 6680 6680 6680 6780 6780 6780 6780 6780 6780 6880 6880 6880 6880 68

80 6980 6980 6980 6980 6980 7080 7080 7080 7080 7080 7180 71

Page 72: Material de Referencia MM

80 7180 7180 7180 7280 7280 7280 7280 7280 7380 7380 7380 7380 73

80 7480 7480 7480 7480 7480 7580 7580 7580 7580 7580 7680 7680 7680 7680 76

80 7780 7780 7780 7780 7780 7880 7880 7880 78

80 7880 78

Page 73: Material de Referencia MM

80 7980 7980 7980 7980 7980 8080 8080 8080 8080 80

GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 2GA 2GA 2GA 2GA 2GA 3GA 3GA 3GA 3GA 3GA 4GA 4

GA 4GA 4GA 4GA 5

GA 5

GA 5

GA 5GA 5GA 6GA 6GA 6

Page 74: Material de Referencia MM

GA 6GA 6GA 7

GA 7GA 7GA 7GA 7

GA 8GA 8GA 8GA 8GA 8

GA 9GA 9

GA 9GA 9GA 9

GA 10GA 10GA 10GA 10GA 10GA 10

GA 11GA 11GA 11GA 11GA 11

GA 12GA 12GA 12GA 12GA 12GA 13GA 13GA 13GA 13

Page 75: Material de Referencia MM

GA 13

GA 14GA 14GA 14GA 14GA 14GA 15GA 15GA 15GA 15GA 15GA 16GA 16GA 16GA 16GA 16

GA 17GA 17

GA 17GA 17GA 17GA 18GA 18GA 18GA 18GA 18

GA 19GA 19GA 19GA 19GA 19

GA 20GA 20GA 20GA 20GA 20

Page 76: Material de Referencia MM

GA 21GA 21GA 21GA 21GA 21GA 22GA 22GA 22GA 22GA 22GA 23GA 23GA 23GA 23GA 23GA 24GA 24GA 24GA 24GA 24

GA 25GA 25GA 25GA 25GA 25GA 26GA 26

GA 26GA 26GA 26GA 27GA 27GA 27GA 27GA 27

GA 28GA 28GA 28GA 28GA 28GA 29

Page 77: Material de Referencia MM

GA 29GA 29GA 29

GA 29GA 29

GA 30GA 30GA 30GA 30GA 30GA 31GA 31GA 31GA 31GA 31

115 1115 2115 3115 4115 5115 6

1157

1158

1159

115

10

115 11115 12

11513

115 14115 15

11516

115 17115 18115 19

Page 78: Material de Referencia MM

115 20

11521

115 22115 23115 24

11525

115 26

11527

115 28115 29115 30115 31115 32

115

33

11534

11535

115 36

115

37

11538

115 39115 40

11541

11542

115 43

11544

115 45

11546

115 47

Page 79: Material de Referencia MM

11548

115 49

11550

115 51

11552

115 53115 54

11555

115 56115 57

11558

11559

115 60

115

61

11562

115 63115 64

11565

115 66115 67

11568

115 69115 70

11571

11572

Page 80: Material de Referencia MM

11573

115 74115 75115 76115 77

11578

11579

115 80115 81115 82115 83

11584

11585

115 86

11587

115 88115 89

115

90

115 91115 92115 93115 94115 95115 96115 97115 98115 99115 100

Page 81: Material de Referencia MM

115101

115102

115 103115 104115 105115 106115 107

115108

115 109

115110

115 111115 112

115113

115 114115 115

Page 82: Material de Referencia MM

QuestionWhat does an account group determine when vendor master records are created? (Choose three.)

A. The number range in which a vendor master record must be created for this account group

B. The default setting of the info update indicator in purchase orders for vendors in this account group

C. The field selection when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

D. The interval of the number assignment (internal or external)

E. The sequence of tab pages when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object "purchasing organization".?

A. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple company codes

B. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple controlling areas

C. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple plants

D. Multiple purchasing groups can be assigned to a purchasing organization

Which field attribute is given the highest priority in the field selection control?

A. Optional field

B. Required entry field+

C. Suppress

D. Display

At what level can you set quantity and value updating on a material type?

A. Plant

B. Company code

C. Valuation area

D. Procurement type

A. Enter "Consignment" as the special procurement type in the material master record.

You procure a material using the "Consignment" process. You want to ensure that purchase requisitions with the "Consignment" item category are generated automatically for requirements in requirements planning. Which of the following settings allows you to do this? (Choose two.)

B. Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and enter it as a fixed source of supply in the source list. C. Activate the quota arrangement for the relevant material and create a quota arrangement item using "Consignment" as the special procurement type. D. Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and select the "Regular Vendor" indicator in the record. Your company manages stock of various advertising articles on a quantity and value basis. In the future, you want to analyze the value of these advertising articles. Unfortunately, the articles have been created with different material types, material groups, valuation classes, and in different number range intervals. For this reason, you want to change the assignments. Which of the following changes are possible, even if stock exists for the articles?

Page 83: Material de Referencia MM

A. Only the confirmed quantity can be posted when the goods are received.

B. Confirmations must be transmitted electronically.

C. The goods receipt can be posted no earlier than the confirmed delivery date.

D. The full confirmed quantity must be entered in one posting in the system.

A. Value contract with item category W (material group) for articles of material group 4711

B. Value contract for material 4711

From which stock type can goods issues to cost centers be posted?

A. Non-valuated blocked stock

B. Valuated blocked stock

C. Quality inspection stock

D. Unrestricted-use stock

What is mandatory in a purchase order for a non-valuated material?

A. Set the indicator for goods receipt.

B. Select an account assignment category and assign an account assignment object.

C. Set the indicator for non-valuated goods receipts.

D. Set the indicator for invoice receipt.

A. Warehouse stock

B. On-order stock

C. Reorder point

D. Non-valuated goods receipt blocked stock

E. Fixed purchase requisitions

A. Withdrawal for scrapping

B. Withdrawal for inspection sample

C. Withdrawal for a reservation

D. Withdrawal for a cost center

In which of the following cases is the goods receipt always posted as non-valuated?

A. Goods receipt for initial stock entry

A. You create a new material group and then change the material group of the advertising articles to the new material group. B. You create a new material type and then change the material type of the advertising articles to the new material type. C. You create a new valuation class and then change the valuation class of the advertising articles to the new valuation class. D. You create a new number range interval and then change the material numbers of the advertising articles to a number in the new number range interval. Before deliveries arrive from certain vendors, you want to be informed of the delivery date and quantity. To do this, you use a confirmation control key. Which of the following settings can you define in a confirmation control key?

For a material without a material master record, a source of supply is to be found when a purchase requisition is created. You request 10 pallets of copier paper belonging to material group 4711. Which of the following sources of supply is proposed by the system?

C. SRM central contract with item category M (material unknown) for 100 tons of copier paper of material group 4711 D. Quantity contract for over 500 pallets of copier paper for a stock material that belongs to material group 4711

Which of the following elements belong to warehouse stock available for MRP in net requirement calculation? (Choose three.)

You want to post a goods issue from stock in quality inspection. In which of the following cases is this possible? (Choose two.)

Page 84: Material de Referencia MM

B. Goods receipt to the stock of material provided to vendor

C. Goods receipt for a free-of-charge delivery

D. Goods receipt to the consignment stock

What can you define for a movement type in Customizing? (Choose two.)

A. The transactions in which a movement type can be used

B. The reversal movement types for a movement type

C. The quantity and value updates for postings with a movement type

D. The number range for material documents that are generated when postings are made with a movement type

Which of the following is a prerequisite for transfer postings between two materials ("material to material")?

A. The materials being transferred must have the same valuation class.

B. The materials being transferred must have the same material type.

C. The materials being transferred must have the same material group.

D. The materials being transferred must have the same base unit of measure.

A. Transfer postings from GR blocked stock to unrestricted-use stock

B. Transfer postings between plants that have the same company code

C. Transfer postings from unrestricted-use stock to quality inspection stock

D. Transfer postings between two storage locations of one plant based on a two-step procedure

A. You reverse the stock removal in the issuing plant and post the scrapping there.

B. You put away the entire quantity in the receiving plant and post the scrapping there.

C. You adjust the stock in transit and put away the remaining quantity in the receiving plant.

What can be triggered by a goods receipt posting? (Choose three.)

A. The buyer receives a message about the goods received.

B. The requisitioner of a referenced purchase requisition receives a message about the goods received.

D. Labels are printed.

E. The MRP controller receives a message about overdeliveries.

A. Cost center

B. Profit center

C. Production order

D. Project (= WBS element)

E. Work center

What can be changed in a material document after it has been posted?

A. The vendor delivery note number in the document header

B. The quantity at item level

C. The stock type at item level

For which transfer postings can an accounting document be generated if the postings are made with a valuated material? (Choose two.)

You transfer material between two plants. During the transport process, some parts are damaged so badly that they have to be scrapped. How you can you post this as scrapping? (Choose two.)

D. You put away the entire quantity in the receiving plant, where you immediately carry out a physical inventory of the material.

C. For stock material, the total quantity and total value are recalculated in the material master record.

For which of the following objects can you post a goods issue directly from the valuated stock using a standard movement type? (Choose three.)

Page 85: Material de Referencia MM

D. The text at item level

A. The material affected must be valuated based on the standard price.

B. The material affected must be valuated based on the moving average price.

C. Stock of the affected material must be available at least in the invoiced quantity.

A. Switch to document parking and then save the invoice.

What does the document type control when an invoice is entered? (Choose two.)

A. The number assignment (number range interval) for the invoice document

B. The number assignment (number range interval) for the accounting document

C. Whether the invoice is posted as gross or net

D. Whether the invoice is blocked for payment when posted

A. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a price difference account.

B. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a separate G/L account for unplanned delivery costs.

C. The unplanned delivery costs are to be split across the invoice items.

A. Posting date

B. Reference

C. Invoice date

D. Terms of payment

A. The vendor has invoiced a price higher than the purchase order price.

B. You have posted an invoice incorrectly and canceled it afterwards.

C. For an item that has been delivered, a higher quantity was invoiced than delivered.

D. The vendor has invoiced a price lower than the purchase order price.

You post an invoice with unplanned delivery costs. These costs should be posted in full to the stock account of a material. What prerequisites must be met to achieve this? (Choose two.)

D. In the invoice header, you have to enter the stock account to which the unplanned delivery costs are to be posted. You receive an invoice from a vendor for a material to the amount of EUR 1,000 for 100 pieces. After you have entered the header data and the purchase order number, the system proposes a quantity of 70 pieces and an amount of EUR 700 from the goods receipt postings. How can you enter the invoice in the system without it being blocked for payment? (Choose two.)

B. Define a tolerance group in the vendor master record of the relevant vendor before posting, so that the invoice is then reduced automatically when posted. C. Use the manual invoice reduction, select the "Vendor Error: Reduce Invoice" option, and enter the quantity and value invoiced by the vendor next to the quantity and value proposed. D. Before posting the invoice, you change the payment block indicator in the invoice header to "Released for Payment".

Which two options can you define in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification to manage unplanned delivery costs for invoice receipts? (Choose two.)

D. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a specific cost center. Answer: B,C

Which fields can you include in the check for duplicate invoices in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

In which of the following cases do you have to maintain GR/IR clearing accounts in Logistics Invoice Verification?

In which of the following cases do you have to enter a subsequent debit in Logistics Invoice Verification? A. The vendor invoices a quantity higher than delivered for a purchase order item in which goods-receipt-based invoice verification is flagged. B. You receive an invoice in foreign currency and the current exchange rate is higher than the rate specified in the purchase order. C. You receive an invoice from a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery costs related to a purchase order item already invoiced.

Page 86: Material de Referencia MM

A. A material document

B. A service entry sheet

C. A vendor delivery note

D. A different invoice from the vendor

In which of the following cases can invoices be released automatically? (Choose two.)

A. The invoice was blocked stochastically.

A. 100%

B. 75%

C. 67.5%

D. 50%

What happens when you cancel invoices in Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

A. The system generates a subsequent debit.

B. The system generates a credit memo.

C. G/L accounts will be newly determined.

D. The system deletes the original invoice document.

A. From the last invoice for the vendor.

B. From the purchasing data in the vendor master record.

C. From the accounting data in the vendor master record.

D. From the first entry in the Customizing table for terms of payment.

A. Material Requirements Planning

B. Purchasing

C. Accounting

D. Basic Data

E. Forecasting

A. Plant

B. Vendor subrange

C. Partner schema

D. You receive an invoice from a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery costs related to a delivery completed purchase order. With reference to which of the following objects can you enter an invoice in Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

B. The invoice was blocked due to a price variance, and the buyer has now changed the price in the purchase order to the invoice price. C. The invoice was blocked manually because the invoice price was lower than the order price, and the buyer has now changed the price in the purchase order to the invoice price. D. The invoice was blocked on the entry date due to date variance. The current date is identical to the delivery date of the order item for which the invoice was blocked. In Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification, the following values are defined for the stochastic block: Threshold value. 10000 Percentage. 50 You enter an invoice with a value of 15000. What is the probability that the invoice will be blocked stochastically?

In Logistics Invoice Verification, from where does the system determine the terms of payment for invoices without a purchase order reference?

You can use profiles to help you enter data in material master records. For which user departments are profiles available? (Choose two.)

At what level in the vendor master record is it possible to define purchasing data that is different from that which is maintained at the purchasing organization level? (Choose two.)

Page 87: Material de Referencia MM

D. Partner role

For which organizational levels can you maintain the material status in material master records? (Choose two.)

A. Client

B. Company code

C. Plant

D. Purchasing organization

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object "plant"?

A. A plant can be assigned directly to one controlling area.

B. A plant can be assigned to several company codes.

C. A plant can be assigned to a reference purchasing organization.

D. A plant can be assigned to exactly one company code.

A. Planned orders

B. Purchase requisitions

C. Schedule lines

D. Purchase orders

E. Production orders

What can an MRP area include? (Choose three.)

A. One plant

B. Multiple plants

C. Multiple storage locations of a plant

D. One subcontractor

E. Multiple subcontractors

A. Purchasing processing time

B. Planned delivery time

C. Requirement lead time

D. Goods receipt processing time

E. Minimum remaining shelf life

A. Procurement type

B. Exception message

C. MRP type

D. MRP controller

Which procurement elements can be generated in the material requirements planning run for a material that is procured only externally? (Choose three.)

Which times belong to the replenishment lead time in the planning run for an externally procured material? (Choose three.)

You perform a total planning run for a plant. On the initial screen, you can select a creation indicator for MRP lists. Which of the following can determine whether an MRP list is created for a material?

During a physical inventory, the warehouse manager has decided to have the quantity of a material recounted for a physical inventory document. How is a recount processed in the system? A. The new count quantity is entered in the existing physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted. B. A new physical inventory document is created. The new count quantity is entered. When the inventory difference is now posted, all physical inventory documents still to be posted for the material affected are deleted. C. A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. After the recount, the inventory difference for the old document is posted first, followed by the inventory difference for the new document.

Page 88: Material de Referencia MM

Which statuses are updated at header level in a physical inventory document? (Choose three.)

A. Count status

B. Adjustment status

C. Delete status

D. Physical inventory status

E. Material status

What data is displayed in the list of inventory differences? (Choose three.)

A. Book quantity

B. Quantity counted

C. Difference quantity

D. Current plant stock

E. Date on which the difference is to be posted

A. Maximum difference amount for each Physical Inventory document

B. Maximum difference amount for each Physical Inventory document item

C. Maximum percentage value variance for each Physical Inventory document item

D. Maximum difference amount for each storage location

E. Maximum quantity variance for each Physical Inventory document item

What special features apply to purchase orders of services (item category D)? (Choose two.)

A. Unknown account assignment is allowed.

B. The price can be determined from the service conditions.

C. All service lines must have the same account assignment.

D. When the service entry sheet is created only services contained in the purchase order can be entered.

A. No, a quotation item for which the rejection indicator is set cannot be converted into a purchase order.

C. Yes, you can create the purchase order regardless of the rejection indicator.

D. No, you have to maintain a new quotation first.

A. Scope of list

B. Selection parameter

C. Layout

D. Breakdown

What can you use to determine the origin of a purchase requisition?

A. Requester

B. Creation indicator

C. MRP controller

D. Processing status

D. A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. The new count quantity is entered in the new physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted.

For posting inventory differences, you can define tolerance groups. What tolerances can you define? (Choose two.)

You have set the rejection indicator in a quotation item. Can you still create a purchase order with reference to this quotation item?

B. Yes, but you have to enter the price in the purchase order manually since it is not copied from the quotation in this case.

You want to create a list of all purchase orders for which you have not yet received an invoice. What can you use to find these specific purchase orders when entering your criteria for the search query?

Page 89: Material de Referencia MM

A. Breakdown

B. Layout

C. Personal settings for the transaction

D. Default values in Customizing

A. Purchasing

B. Accounting

C. General Plant Data/Storage

D. Basic Data

A. In the language in which you are logged on to the system

B. In the language defined in the vendor master record

C. In the language of the purchase order header

D. In the language defined in the output determination Customizing settings

Which procurement element can be created in Purchasing with automatic purchase order generation?

A. Delivery schedules

B. Contracts

C. Invoicing plans

D. Contract release orders

What characterizes an item category in purchasing? (Choose two.)

A. New item categories can be created in Customizing.

B. The item category contains a default value for the invoice receipt indicator in a purchase order item.

D. The name of an item category can be changed in Customizing.

Which settings can be made for account assignment categories? (Choose two.)

D. New account assignment categories can be created in Customizing.

Where are only time-independent conditions defined for the procurement process?

A. In purchasing info records

B. In contracts

C. In purchase orders

D. In scheduling agreements

What advantage does the collective number have in requests for quotations?

B. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating info records from quotations.

C. The collective number makes it easier to select quotation documents for the price comparison.

You set up the document overview in the Enjoy SAP purchase order (transaction ME21N). What setting allows you to sort documents by vendor first and then by document number within a vendor?

You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum? (Choose two.)

You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?

C. Any item category can be used in combination with any account assignment category in a purchase order.

A. The field selection for all fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category. B. The field selection for the account assignment fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category. C. The field selection for all fields of the purchase order header can be defined based on the account assignment category.

A. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for message output of requests for quotations.

Page 90: Material de Referencia MM

D. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating source list entries from quotations.

A. The purchase orders that you recently created

B. The purchase orders found by the system in the last document search

C. The purchase orders for which you last posted goods receipts

D. The purchase orders with today's date as the delivery date

A. Purchase order item of the category "Limit".

C. Purchase order item for which a goods receipt was posted to non-valuated GR blocked stock.

D. Purchase order item with account assignment, for which a goods receipt is not planned.

A. Whether blocked invoices exist for a purchase order item

B. Whether the goods receipt for a purchase order item was posted as valuated or non-valuated

C. The total of open items for a vendor in the current invoice

D. Whether there were return deliveries for a purchase order item

E. Whether there is a different invoicing party in the purchase order for this invoice

A. EUR 1,045

B. EUR 1,026

C. EUR 1,055

D. EUR 1,050

A. Source determination

B. Price determination

C. Message determination

D. Partner determination

Where can you maintain the regular vendor?

A. In the source list at plant level

B. In the info record at client level

C. In the quota arrangement

D. In the info record at purchasing organization level

A. 10

B. 20

C. 30

D. 40

In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the "My documents" overview. Which documents are displayed under "Purchase Orders"?

You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are selected while others are not. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system? (Choose two.)

B. Valuated goods receipt for a purchase order item with a purchase order quantity of 100 pieces. Previous goods movements: Goods receipt of 80 pieces and return delivery to the vendor of 75 pieces.

What can you derive from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (Enter Invoice)? (Choose two.)

A vendor offers you a material at the gross price of EUR 1,000. In addition, the vendor gives you a 10% discount and a 5% cash discount. The vendor charges EUR 200 for freight costs. What is the effective price if you use the calculation schema below?

You want to convert purchase requisitions into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

A release strategy for purchase requisition is defined as follows: -Account Assignment Category " " (blank) -Plant 1000 or 1100 -Purchasing Group 001 =- Item value. > 1000 For which purchase requisition item (see graphic) will this strategy be determined?

Page 91: Material de Referencia MM

What information can you specify in a quota arrangement? (Choose two.)

A. Plant from which material is procured for stock transfer requirements

B. Outline agreement number for external procurement requirements

C. Vendor for external procurement requirements

D. Info record number for external procurement requirements

Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries? (Choose two.)

A. When creating info records

B. When creating contracts

C. Using the Mass Maintenance Tool

D. When creating a purchase order

A. The moving average price of the material is recalculated.

C. The PO price in the purchase orders that are still open is automatically changed to the new price.

D. Invoice verification automatically receives a message about the price change made.

For which of the following transactions can the source of supply be determined automatically? (Choose two.)

A. Create reservation

B. Create purchase order, vendor known

C. Create purchase order, vendor unknown

D. Create purchase requisition

E. Automatic purchase order generation for goods receipt

How can blocked purchase requisitions be released? (Choose two.)

A. Manually, using individual release

B. Manually, using the "Change Purchase Requisition" transaction

C. Manually, using collective release

D. Automatically, when purchase requisitions are converted into purchase orders

A. GR/IR clearing account

B. Consumption account

C. Stock account

D. Price difference account

What are characteristics of material valuation at the moving average price? (Choose two.)

A. Price difference postings can happen when posting an invoice receipt

B. Goods receipts are always valuated based on the moving average price from the material master record

C. The moving average price is equal to the total value multiplied by total quantity of stock

Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials?

A. All valuation classes from the account category reference assigned to the material type.

You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that are open for delivery from the relevant vendor. What happens when the price is changed in the info record?

B. The new price is immediately proposed for all new purchase orders created for the relevant material with the respective vendor.

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purchase order. The material has a material master record and a material type for which quantity and value are updated. The purchase order item has the account assignment category K (= cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L accounts were the postings made? (Choose two.)

D. If a purchase requisition is created, the current moving average price is proposed as the valuation price

Page 92: Material de Referencia MM

B. Any valuation class.

C. All valuation classes of the valuation grouping code of the used valuation area.

D. The default valuation class from the user parameters.

Which rule can be selected in account determination for Inventory postings (Transaction BSX)?

A. General modification

B. Credit/Debit

C. Valuation modification

D. Posting key

Which of the following statements about SAP Solution Manager is correct?

B. SAP Solution Manager is installed as a component of each of your existing landscapes.

C. SAP Solution Manager is used only for implementing your application.

D. SAP Solution Manager is an add-on industry solution.

A. Process for message processing

B. Management of SAP Notes

C. SAP Help

D. Troubleshooting

What is "SAP ERP"?

A. SAP ERP is an application that a company can use to manage its business processes efficiently.

C. SAP ERP is a planning system in which enhanced planning processes can be represented.

Which of the following statements applies to the Enterprise Portal?

A. The portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different systems.

B. The portal is an interface for managing variants of frequently-used transactions.

C. The portal is only a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data.

D. The portal buffers all data so that work can continue in the portal if one of the assigned systems fails.

A. Blanket purchase orders allow non-valuated goods receipts only.

B. Blanket purchase order items require an account assignment to be entered.

C. Blanket purchase orders items can have multiple account assignment.

D. Invoices for blanket purchase orders are always blocked by the system.

What features do subcontracting orders (item category L) have? (Choose two.)

A. The goods receipt for a subcontracting order must always be posted as valuated.

B. At least one component must be provided to the subcontractor.

C. Subcontracting orders may not have an account assignment.

E. For subcontracting orders, an invoice receipt is binding.

A. SAP Solution Manager is a standalone system that communicates with the systems in the system landscape.

SAP Solution Manager contains the Service Desk function. What functions does the Service Desk provide? (Choose two.)

B. SAP ERP is a system that contains components for purchasing, sales, materials management, production, and so on.

D. SAP ERP is a technology platform that can be used as a basis for implementing customer-specific enhancements.

What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparison to a standard purchase order (standard item category)?

D. The price in the purchase order contains both the service provided by the subcontractor and the value of the components.

Page 93: Material de Referencia MM

A. Two

B. Three

C. One

D. Any number

Which attributes do invoicing plans have? (Choose two.)

A. Invoices for invoicing plans can be generated automatically.

B. The start date of an invoicing plan can be defined at item level.

C. Invoicing plans can be used for stock materials as well as for consumable materials.

D. The invoicing plan type for a purchase order item can be changed retroactively.

A. Purchasing

B. Accounting

C. General Plant Data/Storage

D. Basic Data

A. In the language in which you are logged on to the system

B. In the language defined in the vendor master record

C. In the language of the purchase order header

D. In the language defined in the output determination Customizing settings

Which procurement element can be created in Purchasing with automatic purchase order generation?

A. Delivery schedules

B. Contracts

C. Invoicing plans

D. Contract release orders

What characterizes an item category in purchasing? (Choose two.)

A. New item categories can be created in Customizing.

D. The name of an item category can be changed in Customizing.

hich settings can be made for account assignment categories? (Choose two.)

D. New account assignment categories can be created in Customizing.

Where are only time-independent conditions defined for the procurement process?

A. In purchasing info records

B. In contracts

In the future, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. To do this, they are to access catalogs directly from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N?

You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum? (Choose two.)

You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?

B. The item category contains a default value for the invoice receipt indicator in a purchase order item. C. Any item category can be used in combination with any account assignment category in a purchase order.

A. The field selection for all fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category. B. The field selection for the account assignment fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category. C. The field selection for all fields of the purchase order header can be defined based on the account assignment category.

Page 94: Material de Referencia MM

C. In purchase orders

D. In scheduling agreements

What advantage does the collective number have in requests for quotations?

B. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating info records from quotations.

C. The collective number makes it easier to select quotation documents for the price comparison.

D. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating source list entries from quotations.

A. The purchase orders that you recently created

B. The purchase orders found by the system in the last document search

C. The purchase orders for which you last posted goods receipts

D. The purchase orders with today's date as the delivery date

A. Purchase order item of the category "Limit".

C. Purchase order item for which a goods receipt was posted to non-valuated GR blocked stock.

D. Purchase order item with account assignment, for which a goods receipt is not planned.

A. Whether blocked invoices exist for a purchase order item

B. Whether the goods receipt for a purchase order item was posted as valuated or non-valuated

C. The total of open items for a vendor in the current invoice

D. Whether there were return deliveries for a purchase order item

E. Whether there is a different invoicing party in the purchase order for this invoice

A. EUR 1,045

B. EUR 1,026

C. EUR 1,055

D. EUR 1,050

A. Source determination

B. Price determination

C. Message determination

D. Partner determination

Where can you maintain the regular vendor?

A. In the source list at plant level

B. In the info record at client level

C. In the quota arrangement

A. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for message output of requests for quotations.

In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the "My documents" overview. Which documents are displayed under "Purchase Orders"?

58.You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are selected while others are not. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system? (Choose two.)

B. Valuated goods receipt for a purchase order item with a purchase order quantity of 100 pieces. Previous goods movements: Goods receipt of 80 pieces and return delivery to the vendor of 75 pieces.

.What can you derive from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (Enter Invoice)? (Choose two.)

.A vendor offers you a material at the gross price of EUR 1,000. In addition, the vendor gives you a 10% discount and a 5% cash discount. The vendor charges EUR 200 for freight costs. What is the effective price if you use the calculation schema below?

You want to convert purchase requisitions into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

Page 95: Material de Referencia MM

D. In the info record at purchasing organization level

A. 10

B. 20

C. 30

D. 40

What information can you specify in a quota arrangement? (Choose two.)

A. Plant from which material is procured for stock transfer requirements

B. Outline agreement number for external procurement requirements

C. Vendor for external procurement requirements

D. Info record number for external procurement requirements

Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries? (Choose two.)

A. When creating info records

B. When creating contracts

C. Using the Mass Maintenance Tool

D. When creating a purchase order

A. The moving average price of the material is recalculated.

C. The PO price in the purchase orders that are still open is automatically changed to the new price.

D. Invoice verification automatically receives a message about the price change made.

For which of the following transactions can the source of supply be determined automatically? (Choose two.)

A. Create reservation

B. Create purchase order, vendor known

C. Create purchase order, vendor unknown

D. Create purchase requisition

A. Manually, using individual release

B. Manually, using the "Change Purchase Requisition" transaction

C. Manually, using collective release

D. Automatically, when purchase requisitions are converted into purchase orders

A. GR/IR clearing account

B. Consumption account

C. Stock account

D. Price difference account

A release strategy for purchase requisition is defined as follows: Account Assignment Category " " (blank) -Plant 1000 or 1100 -Purchasing Group 001 =- Item value. > 1000 For which purchase requisition item (see graphic) will this strategy be determined?

You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that are open for delivery from the relevant vendor. What happens when the price is changed in the info record?

B. The new price is immediately proposed for all new purchase orders created for the relevant material with the respective vendor.

Automatic purchase order generation for goods receipt .How can blocked purchase requisitions be released? (Choose two.)

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purchase order. The material has a material master record and a material type for which quantity and value are updated. The purchase order item has the account assignment category K (= cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L accounts were the postings made? (Choose two.)

Page 96: Material de Referencia MM

What are characteristics of material valuation at the moving average price? (Choose two.)

A. Price difference postings can happen when posting an invoice receipt

B. Goods receipts are always valuated based on the moving average price from the material master record

C. The moving average price is equal to the total value multiplied by total quantity of stock

Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials?

A. All valuation classes from the account category reference assigned to the material type.

B. Any valuation class.

C. All valuation classes of the valuation grouping code of the used valuation area.

D. The default valuation class from the user parameters.

Which rule can be selected in account determination for Inventory postings (Transaction BSX)?

A. General modification

B. Credit/Debit

C. Valuation modification

D. Posting key

Which of the following statements about SAP Solution Manager is correct?

B. SAP Solution Manager is installed as a component of each of your existing landscapes.

C. SAP Solution Manager is used only for implementing your application.

D. SAP Solution Manager is an add-on industry solution.

A. Process for message processing

B. Management of SAP Notes

C. SAP Help

D. Troubleshooting

What is "SAP ERP"?

A. SAP ERP is an application that a company can use to manage its business processes efficiently.

C. SAP ERP is a planning system in which enhanced planning processes can be represented.

Which of the following statements applies to the Enterprise Portal?

A. The portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different systems.

B. The portal is an interface for managing variants of frequently-used transactions.

C. The portal is only a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data.

D. The portal buffers all data so that work can continue in the portal if one of the assigned systems fails.

A. Blanket purchase orders allow non-valuated goods receipts only.

B. Blanket purchase order items require an account assignment to be entered.

C. Blanket purchase orders items can have multiple account assignment.

D. Invoices for blanket purchase orders are always blocked by the system.

What features do subcontracting orders (item category L) have? (Choose two.)

D. If a purchase requisition is created, the current moving average price is proposed as the valuation price

A. SAP Solution Manager is a standalone system that communicates with the systems in the system landscape.

SAP Solution Manager contains the Service Desk function. What functions does the Service Desk provide? (Choose two.)

B. SAP ERP is a system that contains components for purchasing, sales, materials management, production, and so on.

D. SAP ERP is a technology platform that can be used as a basis for implementing customer-specific enhancements.

What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparison to a standard purchase order (standard item category)?

Page 97: Material de Referencia MM

A. The goods receipt for a subcontracting order must always be posted as valuated.

B. At least one component must be provided to the subcontractor.

C. Subcontracting orders may not have an account assignment.

E. For subcontracting orders, an invoice receipt is binding.

A. Two

B. Three

C. One

D. Any number

Which attributes do invoicing plans have? (Choose two.)

A. Invoices for invoicing plans can be generated automatically.

B. The start date of an invoicing plan can be defined at item level.

C. Invoicing plans can be used for stock materials as well as for consumable materials.

D. The invoicing plan type for a purchase order item can be changed retroactively.

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object purchase organization?What does an account group determine when vendor master records are created?A purchasing organization must always be assigned to a company codeThe storage location key 0001 may be used multiple timesWhich fields attribute is given highest priority in the field selection controlAt what level can you set quantity and value updating on material type

What can be triggered by a good receipt posting?What is mandatory in a purchase order for a non-valuated material?

Which of the following elements belong to warehouse stock available for MRP in net requirementFor which functions can you use transaction Migo

Which of the following statements regarding other goods receipts is correctWhich statements about shelf life expiration date check are correctWhich procedures can generate an accounting document

D. The price in the purchase order contains both the service provided by the subcontractor and the value of the components.

In the future, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. To do this, they are to access catalogs directly from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N?

For a material without material master record, a source of supply is to be found when a purchase requisition is created. Which of the following source of supply is proposed by the systemYou procure a material using the consignment process. You want to ensure that purchase requisition created is going to used to this purposeBefore deliveries arrive from certain vendors, you want to be informed of the delivery date and quantity. Which of the following settings can you define in a confirmation control key?Your company manage stock of various advertising articles on a quantity and value basis in the future you want to analyze the value of this advertising articles.Unfortunately, the articles has been classified with different materia type, material groups, valuations classes, and in different number range intervals for this reason you want to change the assignment.Which of the following changes are possible, even if stock exist for the articles?

For which transfer posting can an account document be generated if the postings are made with a valuated material

You post a goods receipt to the non-valuated GR blocked stock movement type 103. What are the effects of this?

Page 98: Material de Referencia MM

Which are the statement about transfer posting material to material

Which to the following is a prerequisite for transfer postings between two materialsCan you change reservation created automaticallyWhat statements are true about dynamic availability check

From which stock type can goods issues to cost center be posted

In which of the following cases is the good receipt always posted as non- valuatedWhat can you defined in a movement type in CustomizingWhat can be changed in a material document after it has been posted

What does the documet type control when an invoice is entered?

In which of the following cases can invoices be released automatically

In which cases you have to enter a subsequent debit in a logitics invoice verificationWhat happens when you cancel invoices in logistics invoice verification?

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object plant?

For Which organizational levels can you maintain the material status in material master record

You transfer material between two plants. During the transport process some part are damage. How can you post this as scrapping?

You want to post a goods issue from stock in quality inspection in which of the following cases is this possible

For which of the following objects can you post a good issue directly from the valuated stock using a standard movement type

With reference to which of the following objects can you enter an invoice in Logistic Invoice Verification

You received an invoice from a vendor for a material to the amount of 1000 euro, for 100 pieces. After you have entered the header data and the purchase order number, the system proposes a quantity of 70 and an amount of 700 euro, from the good receipt postings. How can you enter the invoice in the system without it being blocked for payment

In Logistics Invoice Verification form where does the system determine the terms of payment for invoices with out PO

You have set up the stochastic check in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification as follows: At a threshold value of 10,000 euros, there is a 50% likelihood of an invoice being blocked. What is the likelihood of an invoice with a value of 15,000 Euros being blocked

A Purchase order has been issued on a vendor for two materials, 150 units of material A has been ordered at 4 uni/pc, 20 units of material B has been ordered at 45 UNI/pc. The vendor has supplied all the materials. The invoice for the supply has been received and posted. He now sends an invoice that includes 825 eur as freight charges and 125 eur as custom duty that was not planned. The system has been configured to distribute delivery costs amongst items. How will the cost be apportioned when the invoice is posted?

Write what are the information that you need to allocate in the invoice verification to post invoices without reference to Purchase Order

Which two options can you define in customizing for logistics invoice verification to manage unplanned delivery costFor the evaluated receipt settlement, the following prerequisite must be fulfilled (Automatic Invoice verification)In which of the following cases you have to maintain GR/IR clearing account in Logistics Inovice VerificationWhich field can you include in the check for duplicate invoices in customizing for logistic invoice verification

You can use profile to help you enter data in material master record. For which user departments are profile available

Page 99: Material de Referencia MM

Which times belongs to replenishment lead time in the planning run for the external procurement

What can an MRP area include?

What data is display in the list of inventory differences?Which statuses are updated at header level in a physical inventory document

For posting inventory differences, you can define tolerance group. What tolerance can you define?Select 4 things what the material type control

Where are only time-independet condition defined for the procurement process

What advantage does the collective number have in request for quatations?What can you use to determine the origin of a purchase requisition?

Which of the following statements are correct in servicesWhat special features apply to purchase orders of services (item category D)

How can you give maintenance to a purchasing info record.

At what level in the vendor master record is it possible to define purchasing data that is different from that which is maintained at client level

Which procurement elements can be generated in the material requirement planning run for a material that is externally procured

You perform a total planning run for a plant. On the initial screen, you can select a creation indicator for MRP list. Which of the following can determine whether an MRP list is created for a material

During the physical inventory, the warehouse manager has decided to have a quantity of a material recounted for a physical inventory document. How is a recounted processed in the system?

You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?You can set the rejection indicator in the quotation item. Can you still create a Purchase Order with reference to this quotation item?

A vendor offer you a mateial at the gross price of 1000 EUR in addition the vendor give you 10% discount and 5% cash discount and absolute freight amount 200. What is the EFECTIVE PRICE.

Level 1 Condition type = PB01, Description = gross price, from (blank)Level 10, Condition type RB01, Description = Discount %, from = 1Level 15, Condition type= ZC01, Description=Sub charge %, from = 1Level 20, , Description = NET VALUELevel 30, Condition type = FRB01, Description = Absolute freight amount, from =20Level 35, Condition type = SKTO, Description = Cash discount, from = 20Level 40, , Description = EFECTIVE PRICE

You set up the document overview in the Enjoy SAP purchase order (transaction ME21N). What setting allows you to sort document by vendor first then by document number within vendor number

When do you service entry sheets are saved, the material document is created and when the service entry sheet are approve, postings are made in financial accounting. It is true or false

You want to create a list of purchase order for which you have not received an invoice. What can you use to find these specific pruchase orders when entering your criteria for the search screenWhich procurement elements can be created in purchasing with automatic purchase order generation

You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are already selected when you call the purchse order. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system?

What can you defined from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (enter invoice)

Page 100: Material de Referencia MM

Which control the document typeWhich settings can be made for account assigment categories?Flag which ones are item categoriesWhat characterizes an item category in purchasing

What control the creation profile in the scheduling agreementBesides manual creation, how can you create source list entries?Where can you mantain the regular vendor?What information can you specify in a quota arrangement?

For which of the following transaction can the source of supply be determinated automatically?

Which statements regarding the release of a purchase requisitionHow can block purchase requisition be released?

Which of the following statements about SAP solution Manager is correctwhich of the following are solution Manager Usage scenarios?Which of the following statements best describes the purpose of the SAP Solution ManagerSolution Monitoring consists of the which tree componentsWhich of the following activites would occur in phase 3? Select the correct answersWhat are the five phases of the implementation roadmap?Which the following statements applies to the enterprise portalWhat is SAP ERP

Which of the following do you enter when you create a blanket purchase order

In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the my documents overview. Which documents are displayed under Purchase Orders

You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimumYou change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that apply the info record. What happens when the price is chaged in the info record

You would like to convert assigned purchase requisitions into follow-on documents. Which of the following statements apply?The source determination in a purchase requistion finds a source of supply is the next sequence: 1 Quota Arrangement; 2 Source List, 3 Outline Agreement, 4 Info Record. This is true or false

You want to convert purchase requisitons into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

A release stategy for a purchase reqisition is defined as follows: Account aassigment category (blank), Plant (1000 or 1100) purchasing group (001), Material (m-01), Valutaion price (>200), quantity (>50). For next lines:

Item 10, AAC (blank), material =m-01, quantity 1, plant (1000), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

Item 20, AAC (blank), material =m-01, quantity 100, plant (1000), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

Item 30, AAC (K), material =m-01, quantity 100, plant (1100), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

Item 40, AAC (blank), material =m-01, quantity 1, plant (1200), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

For which purchase requisition item will this stategy be determinated?

SAP Solution Manager contains the service desk funtion. What funtion does the service desk provide?

Page 101: Material de Referencia MM

Which statements about the subcontracting process are correctwhat features do the subcontracting order have?Which operations are periodic invoincing plans suitable for?Which attributes do invoicing plans have?what are characteristitics of material valuation at the moving averange price?

Which rules you can be selected in account determination for Inventory posting

Account determination always takes place on a plant dependent basis

Value strings can be changed and extended en each company according to particular requirementsWhich valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials

What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparation with standart purchase orderIn the feature, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purcharse order. The material has the material master record and account assigment category = K (cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L account were the posting made??

Does the movement type with which a goods receipt is recorded have any influence on the G/L accounts of the GR posting

Mention what are the principal and direct factor to determine the automatic account determinationTo be able to use production planning (component PP) material valuation must be set up at company code level

Page 102: Material de Referencia MM

A. The number range in which a vendor master record must be created for this account group

B. The default setting of the info update indicator in purchase orders for vendors in this account group

C. The field selection when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

D. The interval of the number assignment (internal or external)

E. The sequence of tab pages when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

Page 103: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Question 1

80 1

80 2

80 3A. Optional field

80 4A. Plant

80 5

80 6

80 7

80 8

80 9

80 10

What does an account group determine when vendor master records are created? (Choose three.)

A. The number range in which a vendor master record must be created for this account group

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object "purchasing organization".?

A. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple company codes

Which field attribute is given the highest priority in the field selection control? At what level can you set quantity and value updating on a material type? You procure a material using the "Consignment" process. You want to ensure that purchase requisitions with the "Consignment" item category are generated automatically for requirements in requirements planning. Which of the following settings allows you to do this? (Choose two.)

A. Enter "Consignment" as the special procurement type in the material master record.

Your company manages stock of various advertising articles on a quantity and value basis. In the future, you want to analyze the value of these advertising articles. Unfortunately, the articles have been created with different material types, material groups, valuation classes, and in different number range intervals. For this reason, you want to change the assignments. Which of the following changes are possible, even if stock exists for the articles?

A. You create a new material group and then change the material group of the advertising articles to the new material group.

Before deliveries arrive from certain vendors, you want to be informed of the delivery date and quantity. To do this, you use a confirmation control key. Which of the following settings can you define in a confirmation control key?

A. Only the confirmed quantity can be posted when the goods are received.

For a material without a material master record, a source of supply is to be found when a purchase requisition is created. You request 10 pallets of copier paper belonging to material group 4711. Which of the following sources of supply is proposed by the system?

A. Value contract with item category W (material group) for articles of material group 4711

From which stock type can goods issues to cost centers be posted?

A. Non-valuated blocked stock

What is mandatory in a purchase order for a non-valuated material?

A. Set the indicator for goods receipt.

Page 104: Material de Referencia MM

80 11

80 12

80 13

80 14

80 15

80 16

80 17

80 18

80 19

A. Cost center

80 20

80 21

Which of the following elements belong to warehouse stock available for MRP in net requirement calculation? (Choose three.)

A. Warehouse stock

You want to post a goods issue from stock in quality inspection. In which of the following cases is this possible? (Choose two.)

A. Withdrawal for scrapping

In which of the following cases is the goods receipt always posted as non-valuated?

A. Goods receipt for initial stock entry

What can you define for a movement type in Customizing? (Choose two.)

A. The transactions in which a movement type can be used

Which of the following is a prerequisite for transfer postings between two materials ("material to material")?

A. The materials being transferred must have the same valuation class.

For which transfer postings can an accounting document be generated if the postings are made with a valuated material? (Choose two.)

A. Transfer postings from GR blocked stock to unrestricted-use stock

You transfer material between two plants. During the transport process, some parts are damaged so badly that they have to be scrapped. How you can you post this as scrapping? (Choose two.)

A. You reverse the stock removal in the issuing plant and post the scrapping there.

What can be triggered by a goods receipt posting? (Choose three.)

A. The buyer receives a message about the goods received.

For which of the following objects can you post a goods issue directly from the valuated stock using a standard movement type? (Choose three.) What can be changed in a material document after it has been posted?

A. The vendor delivery note number in the document header

You post an invoice with unplanned delivery costs. These costs should be posted in full to the stock account of a material. What prerequisites must be met to achieve this? (Choose two.)

A. The material affected must be valuated based on the standard price.

Page 105: Material de Referencia MM

80 22

80 23

80 24

80 25

A. Posting date

80 26

80 27

80 28

80 29

You receive an invoice from a vendor for a material to the amount of EUR 1,000 for 100 pieces. After you have entered the header data and the purchase order number, the system proposes a quantity of 70 pieces and an amount of EUR 700 from the goods receipt postings. How can you enter the invoice in the system without it being blocked for payment? (Choose two.)

A. Switch to document parking and then save the invoice.

What does the document type control when an invoice is entered? (Choose two.)

A. The number assignment (number range interval) for the invoice document

Which two options can you define in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification to manage unplanned delivery costs for invoice receipts? (Choose two.)

A. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a price difference account.

Which fields can you include in the check for duplicate invoices in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.) In which of the following cases do you have to maintain GR/IR clearing accounts in Logistics Invoice Verification?

A. The vendor has invoiced a price higher than the purchase order price.

In which of the following cases do you have to enter a subsequent debit in Logistics Invoice Verification?

A. The vendor invoices a quantity higher than delivered for a purchase order item in which goods-receipt-based invoice verification is flagged.

With reference to which of the following objects can you enter an invoice in Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

A. A material document

In which of the following cases can invoices be released automatically? (Choose two.)

A. The invoice was blocked stochastically.

Page 106: Material de Referencia MM

80 30

A. 100%

80 31

80 32

80 33

80 34

A. Plant

80 35A. Client

80 36

80 37

A. Planned orders

80 38What can an MRP area include? (Choose three.) A. One plant

80 39

80 40

A. Procurement type

80 41

80 42A. Count status

80 43

A. Book quantity

In Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification, the following values are defined for the stochastic block: Threshold value. 10000 Percentage. 50 You enter an invoice with a value of 15000. What is the probability that the invoice will be blocked stochastically?

What happens when you cancel invoices in Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

A. The system generates a subsequent debit.

In Logistics Invoice Verification, from where does the system determine the terms of payment for invoices without a purchase order reference?

A. From the last invoice for the vendor.

You can use profiles to help you enter data in material master records. For which user departments are profiles available? (Choose two.)

A. Material Requirements Planning

At what level in the vendor master record is it possible to define purchasing data that is different from that which is maintained at the purchasing organization level? (Choose two.)

For which organizational levels can you maintain the material status in material master records? (Choose two.) Which assignment can be made for the organizational object "plant"?

A. A plant can be assigned directly to one controlling area.

Which procurement elements can be generated in the material requirements planning run for a material that is procured only externally? (Choose three.)

Which times belong to the replenishment lead time in the planning run for an externally procured material? (Choose three.)

A. Purchasing processing time

You perform a total planning run for a plant. On the initial screen, you can select a creation indicator for MRP lists. Which of the following can determine whether an MRP list is created for a material?

During a physical inventory, the warehouse manager has decided to have the quantity of a material recounted for a physical inventory document. How is a recount processed in the system?

A. The new count quantity is entered in the existing physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted.

Which statuses are updated at header level in a physical inventory document? (Choose three.) What data is displayed in the list of inventory differences? (Choose three.)

Page 107: Material de Referencia MM

80 44

80 45

80 46

80 47

A. Scope of list

80 48A. Requester

80 49

A. Breakdown

80 50

A. Purchasing

80 51

80 52

80 53

80 54

80 55

For posting inventory differences, you can define tolerance groups. What tolerances can you define? (Choose two.)

A. Maximum difference amount for each Physical Inventory document

What special features apply to purchase orders of services (item category D)? (Choose two.)

A. Unknown account assignment is allowed.

You have set the rejection indicator in a quotation item. Can you still create a purchase order with reference to this quotation item?

A. No, a quotation item for which the rejection indicator is set cannot be converted into a purchase order.

You want to create a list of all purchase orders for which you have not yet received an invoice. What can you use to find these specific purchase orders when entering your criteria for the search query?

What can you use to determine the origin of a purchase requisition? You set up the document overview in the Enjoy SAP purchase order (transaction ME21N). What setting allows you to sort documents by vendor first and then by document number within a vendor?

You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum? (Choose two.) You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?

A. In the language in which you are logged on to the system

Which procurement element can be created in Purchasing with automatic purchase order generation?

A. Delivery schedules

What characterizes an item category in purchasing? (Choose two.)

A. New item categories can be created in Customizing.

Which settings can be made for account assignment categories? (Choose two.)

A. The field selection for all fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category.

Where are only time-independent conditions defined for the procurement process?

A. In purchasing info records

Page 108: Material de Referencia MM

80 56

80 57

80 58

80 59

80 60

A. EUR 1,045

80 61

80 62

Where can you maintain the regular vendor?

80 63

A. 10

80 64

80 65

What advantage does the collective number have in requests for quotations?

A. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for message output of requests for quotations.

In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the "My documents" overview. Which documents are displayed under "Purchase Orders"?

A. The purchase orders that you recently created

You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are selected while others are not. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system? (Choose two.)

A. Purchase order item of the category "Limit".

What can you derive from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (Enter Invoice)? (Choose two.)

A. Whether blocked invoices exist for a purchase order item

A vendor offers you a material at the gross price of EUR 1,000. In addition, the vendor gives you a 10% discount and a 5% cash discount. The vendor charges EUR 200 for freight costs. What is the effective price if you use the calculation schema below?

You want to convert purchase requisitions into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

A. Source determination

A. In the source list at plant level

A release strategy for purchase requisition is defined as follows: -Account Assignment Category " " (blank) -Plant 1000 or 1100 -Purchasing Group 001 =- Item value. > 1000 For which purchase requisition item (see graphic) will this strategy be determined?

What information can you specify in a quota arrangement? (Choose two.)

A. Plant from which material is procured for stock transfer requirements

Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries? (Choose two.)

A. When creating info records

Page 109: Material de Referencia MM

80 66

80 67

80 68

80 69

80 70

80 71

80 72

80 73

80 74

80 75

What is "SAP ERP"?

You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that are open for delivery from the relevant vendor. What happens when the price is changed in the info record?

A. The moving average price of the material is recalculated.

For which of the following transactions can the source of supply be determined automatically? (Choose two.)

A. Create reservation

How can blocked purchase requisitions be released? (Choose two.)

A. Manually, using individual release

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purchase order. The material has a material master record and a material type for which quantity and value are updated. The purchase order item has the account assignment category K (= cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L accounts were the postings made? (Choose two.)

A. GR/IR clearing account

What are characteristics of material valuation at the moving average price? (Choose two.)

A. Price difference postings can happen when posting an invoice receipt

Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials?

A. All valuation classes from the account category reference assigned to the material type.

Which rule can be selected in account determination for Inventory postings (Transaction BSX)?

A. General modification

Which of the following statements about SAP Solution Manager is correct?

A. SAP Solution Manager is a standalone system that communicates with the systems in the system landscape.

SAP Solution Manager contains the Service Desk function. What functions does the Service Desk provide? (Choose two.)

A. Process for message processing A. SAP ERP is an application that a company can use to manage its business processes efficiently.

Page 110: Material de Referencia MM

80 76

80 77

80 78

80 79

A. Two

80 80

Which attributes do invoicing plans have? (Choose two.)

GA 1

A. Purchasing

GA 2

GA 3

GA 4

GA 5

Which of the following statements applies to the Enterprise Portal?

A. The portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different systems.

What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparison to a standard purchase order (standard item category)?

A. Blanket purchase orders allow non-valuated goods receipts only.

What features do subcontracting orders (item category L) have? (Choose two.)

A. The goods receipt for a subcontracting order must always be posted as valuated.

In the future, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. To do this, they are to access catalogs directly from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N? A. Invoices for

invoicing plans can be generated automatically.

You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum? (Choose two.) You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?

A. In the language in which you are logged on to the system

Which procurement element can be created in Purchasing with automatic purchase order generation?

A. Delivery schedules

What characterizes an item category in purchasing? (Choose two.)

A. New item categories can be created in Customizing.

Which settings can be made for account assignment categories? (Choose two.)

A. The field selection for all fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category.

Page 111: Material de Referencia MM

GA 6

GA 7

GA 8

GA 9

GA 10

GA 11

A. EUR 1,045

GA 12

GA 13

Where can you maintain the regular vendor?

GA 14

A. 10

GA 15

GA 16

Where are only time-independent conditions defined for the procurement process?

A. In purchasing info records

What advantage does the collective number have in requests for quotations?

A. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for message output of requests for quotations.

In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the "My documents" overview. Which documents are displayed under "Purchase Orders"?

A. The purchase orders that you recently created

You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are selected while others are not. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system? (Choose two.)

A. Purchase order item of the category "Limit".

What can you derive from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (Enter Invoice)? (Choose two.)

A. Whether blocked invoices exist for a purchase order item

A vendor offers you a material at the gross price of EUR 1,000. In addition, the vendor gives you a 10% discount and a 5% cash discount. The vendor charges EUR 200 for freight costs. What is the effective price if you use the calculation schema below?

You want to convert purchase requisitions into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

A. Source determination

A. In the source list at plant level

A release strategy for purchase requisition is defined as follows: Account Assignment Category " " (blank) -Plant 1000 or 1100 -Purchasing Group 001 =- Item value. > 1000 For which purchase requisition item (see graphic) will this strategy be determined?

What information can you specify in a quota arrangement? (Choose two.)

A. Plant from which material is procured for stock transfer requirements

Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries? (Choose two.)

A. When creating info records

Page 112: Material de Referencia MM

GA 17

GA 18

GA 19

GA 20

GA 21

GA 22

GA 23

GA 24

GA 25

GA 26

What is "SAP ERP"?

You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that are open for delivery from the relevant vendor. What happens when the price is changed in the info record?

A. The moving average price of the material is recalculated.

For which of the following transactions can the source of supply be determined automatically? (Choose two.)

A. Create reservation

Automatic purchase order generation for goods receipt .How can blocked purchase requisitions be released? (Choose two.)

A. Manually, using individual release

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purchase order. The material has a material master record and a material type for which quantity and value are updated. The purchase order item has the account assignment category K (= cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L accounts were the postings made? (Choose two.)

A. GR/IR clearing account

What are characteristics of material valuation at the moving average price? (Choose two.)

A. Price difference postings can happen when posting an invoice receipt

Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials?

A. All valuation classes from the account category reference assigned to the material type.

Which rule can be selected in account determination for Inventory postings (Transaction BSX)?

A. General modification

Which of the following statements about SAP Solution Manager is correct?

A. SAP Solution Manager is a standalone system that communicates with the systems in the system landscape.

SAP Solution Manager contains the Service Desk function. What functions does the Service Desk provide? (Choose two.)

A. Process for message processing A. SAP ERP is an application that a company can use to manage its business processes efficiently.

Page 113: Material de Referencia MM

GA 27

GA 28

GA 29

GA 30

A. Two

GA 31

Which attributes do invoicing plans have? (Choose two.)

115

1

115

2

115 3 TRUE

115 4 TRUE

115 5 Required entry field

115 6 Procurement type

115

7

Which of the following statements applies to the Enterprise Portal?

A. The portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different systems.

What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparison to a standard purchase order (standard item category)?

A. Blanket purchase orders allow non-valuated goods receipts only.

What features do subcontracting orders (item category L) have? (Choose two.)

A. The goods receipt for a subcontracting order must always be posted as valuated.

In the future, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. To do this, they are to access catalogs directly from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N? A. Invoices for

invoicing plans can be generated automatically.

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object purchase organization?

Purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple controlling areas

What does an account group determine when vendor master records are created?

The number range in which a vendor master record must be created for this account group

A purchasing organization must always be assigned to a company codeThe storage location key 0001 may be used multiple timesWhich fields attribute is given highest priority in the field selection controlAt what level can you set quantity and value updating on material type

For a material without material master record, a source of supply is to be found when a purchase requisition is created. Which of the following source of supply is proposed by the system

Quantity contract for over 500 pallets of copier paper for stock material that belongs to material group 4711

Page 114: Material de Referencia MM

115

8

115

9

115

10

115

11 What can be triggered by a good receipt posting?

115

12

115

13

115 14 Warehouse stock

115 15 For which functions can you use transaction Migo Creating reservations

115

16

115

17

115

18

You procure a material using the consignment process. You want to ensure that purchase requisition created is going to used to this purpose

Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and select the regular vendor indicator

Before deliveries arrive from certain vendors, you want to be informed of the delivery date and quantity. Which of the following settings can you define in a confirmation control key?

Confirmations must be transmitted electronically

Your company manage stock of various advertising articles on a quantity and value basis in the future you want to analyze the value of this advertising articles.Unfortunately, the articles has been classified with different materia type, material groups, valuations classes, and in different number range intervals for this reason you want to change the assignment.Which of the following changes are possible, even if stock exist for the articles?

You create a new number range interval and then change the material numbers of the advertising articles to a number in the new number range intervalFor stock material, the total quantity and total value are recalculated in the material master record

What is mandatory in a purchase order for a non-valuated material?

Set the indicator for non-valuated good receipt

For which transfer posting can an account document be generated if the postings are made with a valuated material

Transfer posting from unrestricted use stock to quality inspection stock

Which of the following elements belong to warehouse stock available for MRP in net requirement

You post a goods receipt to the non-valuated GR blocked stock movement type 103. What are the effects of this?

The quantity booked into GR Blocked stock is not yet available for MRP

Which of the following statements regarding other goods receipts is correct

Other goods receipts are receipts that cannot reference another document

Which statements about shelf life expiration date check are correct

You must maintain the remainging shelf life in the PO

Page 115: Material de Referencia MM

11519 Which procedures can generate an accounting document

115

20

115

21

115

22

115 23 Can you change reservation created automatically YES

115

24

115 25

115 26

11527

11528

115

29 What can you defined in a movement type in Customizing

11530 Quantity at item level

115 31

115

32

Material to material transfer posting

Which are the statement about transfer posting material to material

can only be carried out in a single step

You transfer material between two plants. During the transport process some part are damage. How can you post this as scrapping?

You put away the entire quantity to the receiving plant and post the scrapping there

Which to the following is a prerequisite for transfer postings between two materials

The materials being transferred must have the same material type

What statements are true about dynamic availability check

You can not configure the message (warning or error)

You want to post a goods issue from stock in quality inspection in which of the following cases is this possible

Withdrawal for inspection sample

From which stock type can goods issues to cost center be posted

Unrestricted-use stock

For which of the following objects can you post a good issue directly from the valuated stock using a standard movement type

Project (WBS element)

In which of the following cases is the good receipt always posted as non- valuated

Good receipt to the stock of material provided to vendor

The reversal movement type for a movement type

What can be changed in a material document after it has been posted

With reference to which of the following objects can you enter an invoice in Logistic Invoice Verification

A vendor delivery note

What does the documet type control when an invoice is entered?

Whether the invoice is blocked for payment when posted

Page 116: Material de Referencia MM

115

33

11534

115

35 50%

115

36

115

37

115

38

115

39

11540

You received an invoice from a vendor for a material to the amount of 1000 euro, for 100 pieces. After you have entered the header data and the purchase order number, the system proposes a quantity of 70 and an amount of 700 euro, from the good receipt postings. How can you enter the invoice in the system without it being blocked for payment

Use manual invoice reduction, select the vendor error. Reduce invoice option, and enter the quantity and value invoiced by the vendor next to the quantity and value proposed.

In Logistics Invoice Verification form where does the system determine the terms of payment for invoices with out PO

From the purchasing data in the vendor master record

You have set up the stochastic check in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification as follows: At a threshold value of 10,000 euros, there is a 50% likelihood of an invoice being blocked. What is the likelihood of an invoice with a value of 15,000 Euros being blocked

In which of the following cases can invoices be released automatically

Invoices that were blocked due to a quantity variance, provided that the entire invoiced quantity has in the meantime been posted as a goods receipt

A Purchase order has been issued on a vendor for two materials, 150 units of material A has been ordered at 4 uni/pc, 20 units of material B has been ordered at 45 UNI/pc. The vendor has supplied all the materials. The invoice for the supply has been received and posted. He now sends an invoice that includes 825 eur as freight charges and 125 eur as custom duty that was not planned. The system has been configured to distribute delivery costs amongst items. How will the cost be apportioned when the invoice is posted?

Stock account for material A 380 + Stock account for Material B 570 +

Write what are the information that you need to allocate in the invoice verification to post invoices without reference to Purchase Order

basic data: posting date, document date, amount, currency, tax code payment:base line date, payment term

In which cases you have to enter a subsequent debit in a logitics invoice verification

You received and invoice from a forwarding agent or unplanned delivery cost related to a delivery that it is not invoiced

What happens when you cancel invoices in logistics invoice verification?

The system generates a credit memo

Page 117: Material de Referencia MM

115

41

115

42

115

43

115 44 Term of payment

115

45

11546 Basic data

115 47 Company Code

11548 partner schema

115 49

11550 production orders

115 51 What can an MRP area include? One subcontractor

115

52 Exception message

11553 What data is display in the list of inventory differences?

115 54

Which two options can you define in customizing for logistics invoice verification to manage unplanned delivery cost

The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to specific cost center

For the evaluated receipt settlement, the following prerequisite must be fulfilled (Automatic Invoice verification)

The purchase order must be created automatically

In which of the following cases you have to maintain GR/IR clearing account in Logistics Inovice Verification

You posted an invoice incorrectly and canceled it afterwards

Which field can you include in the check for duplicate invoices in customizing for logistic invoice verification

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object plant?

A Plant can be assigned to a exactly one company code

You can use profile to help you enter data in material master record. For which user departments are profile availableFor Which organizational levels can you maintain the material status in material master recordAt what level in the vendor master record is it possible to define purchasing data that is different from that which is maintained at client levelWhich times belongs to replenishment lead time in the planning run for the external procurement

Purchasing processing time

Which procurement elements can be generated in the material requirement planning run for a material that is externally procured

You perform a total planning run for a plant. On the initial screen, you can select a creation indicator for MRP list. Which of the following can determine whether an MRP list is created for a material

Date on which the difference is to be posted

Which statuses are updated at header level in a physical inventory document

Physical inventory status

Page 118: Material de Referencia MM

115

55

115

56

115 57 Select 4 things what the material type control Number Range

115

58

115

59

115 60 Contracts

115

61 1045

115

62 Break Down

During the physical inventory, the warehouse manager has decided to have a quantity of a material recounted for a physical inventory document. How is a recounted processed in the system?

A new physical inventory document is created with reference to a original document. The new counted quantity is entered in the new physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted

For posting inventory differences, you can define tolerance group. What tolerance can you define?

Maximum difference amount for each physical inventory document

You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?

In the language of the purchase order header

You can set the rejection indicator in the quotation item. Can you still create a Purchase Order with reference to this quotation item?

Yes, but you have to enter the price manually since it is not copied from the quotation

Where are only time-independet condition defined for the procurement process

A vendor offer you a mateial at the gross price of 1000 EUR in addition the vendor give you 10% discount and 5% cash discount and absolute freight amount 200. What is the EFECTIVE PRICE.

Level 1 Condition type = PB01, Description = gross price, from (blank)Level 10, Condition type RB01, Description = Discount %, from = 1Level 15, Condition type= ZC01, Description=Sub charge %, from = 1Level 20, , Description = NET VALUELevel 30, Condition type = FRB01, Description = Absolute freight amount, from =20Level 35, Condition type = SKTO, Description = Cash discount, from = 20Level 40, , Description = EFECTIVE PRICE

You set up the document overview in the Enjoy SAP purchase order (transaction ME21N). What setting allows you to sort document by vendor first then by document number within vendor number

Page 119: Material de Referencia MM

115

63

115 64 Processing status

115

65 YES

115

66 Which of the following statements are correct in services

115

67

115

68 Selection parameter

115 69 Invoicing plan

115 70 PO

115

71

115

72

115

73

115 74 Which control the document type

115

75

115 76 Flag which ones are item categories cost center

What advantage does the collective number have in request for quatations?

The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating source list entries

What can you use to determine the origin of a purchase requisition?When do you service entry sheets are saved, the material document is created and when the service entry sheet are approve, postings are made in financial accounting. It is true or false

When procuring services, you can work with or without a service master record

What special features apply to purchase orders of services (item category D)

The price can be determinated from the service conditions

You want to create a list of purchase order for which you have not received an invoice. What can you use to find these specific pruchase orders when entering your criteria for the search screenWhich procurement elements can be created in purchasing with automatic purchase order generationHow can you give maintenance to a purchasing info record.You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are already selected when you call the purchse order. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system?

Purchase order item with account assignment, for which a goods receipt is not planned

What can you defined from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (enter invoice)

Whether the goods receipt for a purchase order item was posted as valuated or non-valuated

In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the my documents overview. Which documents are displayed under Purchase Orders

The purchase order found by the system in the last document searchaccount determination

Which settings can be made for account assigment categories?

New account assigment category can be created in customizing

Page 120: Material de Referencia MM

115

77 What characterizes an item category in purchasing

11578

115

79

115 80 Delivery Date

115 81

11582 Where can you mantain the regular vendor?

115

83

115

84

115

85 TRUE

11586

115

87 Source determination

New item category can be created in customizing

You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum

General plant data / storage

You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that apply the info record. What happens when the price is chaged in the info record

The moving average price of the material is recalculated

What control the creation profile in the scheduling agreementBesides manual creation, how can you create source list entries?

Using the mass maintenance tool

In the source list at plant level

What information can you specify in a quota arrangement?

Outline agreement number external procurement requirements

You would like to convert assigned purchase requisitions into follow-on documents. Which of the following statements apply?

You can convert several requisition items from the same vendor to a purchase order. In this case, one requisition item is generated for each PO item

The source determination in a purchase requistion finds a source of supply is the next sequence: 1 Quota Arrangement; 2 Source List, 3 Outline Agreement, 4 Info Record. This is true or false

For which of the following transaction can the source of supply be determinated automatically?

Automatic purchase order generation for good receipt

You want to convert purchase requisitons into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

Page 121: Material de Referencia MM

115

88

115

89 How can block purchase requisition be released?

115

90 40

115

91

115 92

115

93

115 94

115

95

Which statements regarding the release of a purchase requisition

The release status describes which follow-on documents can be generated from purchase requisition

Manually, using the collective release

A release stategy for a purchase reqisition is defined as follows: Account aassigment category (blank), Plant (1000 or 1100) purchasing group (001), Material (m-01), Valutaion price (>200), quantity (>50). For next lines:

Item 10, AAC (blank), material =m-01, quantity 1, plant (1000), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

Item 20, AAC (blank), material =m-01, quantity 100, plant (1000), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

Item 30, AAC (K), material =m-01, quantity 100, plant (1100), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

Item 40, AAC (blank), material =m-01, quantity 1, plant (1200), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

For which purchase requisition item will this stategy be determinated?

Which of the following statements about SAP solution Manager is correct

Solution Manger is installed as component of each of your existing landscape

which of the following are solution Manager Usage scenarios?

Monitor SAP support Desk

Which of the following statements best describes the purpose of the SAP Solution Manager

To provide the tools, content and service to implement, operate, monitor and support the SAP Solution

Solution Monitoring consists of the which tree components

SAP service marketplace

Which of the following activites would occur in phase 3? Select the correct answers

Configuring the system

Page 122: Material de Referencia MM

115

96

115

97

115

98 What is SAP ERP

115 99 Troubleshooting

115 100 vendor

115

101

115

102 one

115

103

115

104 what features do the subcontracting order have?

115 105 Rental payments

115

106 Which attributes do invoicing plans have?

115

107

What are the five phases of the implementation roadmap?

Project preparation, configuration blue print, realization, final publish, go live and support

Which the following statements applies to the enterprise portal

The portal is an interface for managing variants of frecuently used transaction

SAP ERP is a planing system in which enhanced planning processes can be represented

SAP Solution Manager contains the service desk funtion. What funtion does the service desk provide?Which of the following do you enter when you create a blanket purchase order

What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparation with standart purchase order

invoice for a blanket purchase order are always blocked by the system

In the feature, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N

Which statements about the subcontracting process are correct

You must set the especial stock indicator O in the purchase order

For subcontracting order an invoice receipt is binding

Which operations are periodic invoincing plans suitable for?

Invoice can be generated automatically

what are characteristitics of material valuation at the moving averange price?

The moving averange price is equal to the total value multipled by total quantity of stock

Page 123: Material de Referencia MM

115

108 Consumption account

115 109 General modification

115110 Yes

115 111 Verdadero

115 112 Valuation class

115 113 Verdadero

115 114 Verdadero

115

115 any valuation classes

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purcharse order. The material has the material master record and account assigment category = K (cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L account were the posting made??

Which rules you can be selected in account determination for Inventory postingDoes the movement type with which a goods receipt is recorded have any influence on the G/L accounts of the GR postingAccount determination always takes place on a plant dependent basisMention what are the principal and direct factor to determine the automatic account determinationTo be able to use production planning (component PP) material valuation must be set up at company code levelValue strings can be changed and extended en each company according to particular requirements

Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials

Page 124: Material de Referencia MM

Answer2 3 4 5

C. Suppress D. Display

B. Company code C. Valuation area D. Procurement type

B. The default setting of the info update indicator in purchase orders for vendors in this account group

C. The field selection when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

D. The interval of the number assignment (internal or external)

E. The sequence of tab pages when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

B. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple controlling areas

C. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple plants

D. Multiple purchasing groups can be assigned to a purchasing organization

B. Required entry field+

B. Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and enter it as a fixed source of supply in the source list.

C. Activate the quota arrangement for the relevant material and create a quota arrangement item using "Consignment" as the special procurement type.

D. Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and select the "Regular Vendor" indicator in the record.

B. You create a new material type and then change the material type of the advertising articles to the new material type.

C. You create a new valuation class and then change the valuation class of the advertising articles to the new valuation class.

D. You create a new number range interval and then change the material numbers of the advertising articles to a number in the new number range interval.

B. Confirmations must be transmitted electronically.

C. The goods receipt can be posted no earlier than the confirmed delivery date.

D. The full confirmed quantity must be entered in one posting in the system.

B. Value contract for material 4711

C. SRM central contract with item category M (material unknown) for 100 tons of copier paper of material group 4711

D. Quantity contract for over 500 pallets of copier paper for a stock material that belongs to material group 4711

B. Valuated blocked stock

C. Quality inspection stock

D. Unrestricted-use stock

B. Select an account assignment category and assign an account assignment object.

C. Set the indicator for non-valuated goods receipts.

D. Set the indicator for invoice receipt.

Page 125: Material de Referencia MM

B. On-order stock C. Reorder point

B. Profit center C. Production order E. Work center

D. Non-valuated goods receipt blocked stock

E. Fixed purchase requisitions

B. Withdrawal for inspection sample

C. Withdrawal for a reservation

D. Withdrawal for a cost center

B. Goods receipt to the stock of material provided to vendor

C. Goods receipt for a free-of-charge delivery

D. Goods receipt to the consignment stock

B. The reversal movement types for a movement type

C. The quantity and value updates for postings with a movement type

D. The number range for material documents that are generated when postings are made with a movement type B. The materials

being transferred must have the same material type.

C. The materials being transferred must have the same material group.

D. The materials being transferred must have the same base unit of measure.

B. Transfer postings between plants that have the same company code

C. Transfer postings from unrestricted-use stock to quality inspection stock

D. Transfer postings between two storage locations of one plant based on a two-step procedure

B. You put away the entire quantity in the receiving plant and post the scrapping there.

C. You adjust the stock in transit and put away the remaining quantity in the receiving plant.

D. You put away the entire quantity in the receiving plant, where you immediately carry out a physical inventory of the material.

B. The requisitioner of a referenced purchase requisition receives a message about the goods received.

C. For stock material, the total quantity and total value are recalculated in the material master record.

D. Labels are printed.

E. The MRP controller receives a message about overdeliveries.

D. Project (= WBS element)

B. The quantity at item level

C. The stock type at item level

D. The text at item level

B. The material affected must be valuated based on the moving average price.

C. Stock of the affected material must be available at least in the invoiced quantity.

D. In the invoice header, you have to enter the stock account to which the unplanned delivery costs are to be posted.

Page 126: Material de Referencia MM

B. Reference C. Invoice date D. Terms of payment

B. Define a tolerance group in the vendor master record of the relevant vendor before posting, so that the invoice is then reduced automatically when posted.

C. Use the manual invoice reduction, select the "Vendor Error: Reduce Invoice" option, and enter the quantity and value invoiced by the vendor next to the quantity and value proposed.

D. Before posting the invoice, you change the payment block indicator in the invoice header to "Released for Payment".

B. The number assignment (number range interval) for the accounting document

C. Whether the invoice is posted as gross or net

D. Whether the invoice is blocked for payment when posted

B. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a separate G/L account for unplanned delivery costs.

C. The unplanned delivery costs are to be split across the invoice items.

D. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a specific cost center. Answer: B,C

B. You have posted an invoice incorrectly and canceled it afterwards.

C. For an item that has been delivered, a higher quantity was invoiced than delivered.

D. The vendor has invoiced a price lower than the purchase order price.

B. You receive an invoice in foreign currency and the current exchange rate is higher than the rate specified in the purchase order.

C. You receive an invoice from a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery costs related to a purchase order item already invoiced.

D. You receive an invoice from a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery costs related to a delivery completed purchase order.

B. A service entry sheet

C. A vendor delivery note

D. A different invoice from the vendor

B. The invoice was blocked due to a price variance, and the buyer has now changed the price in the purchase order to the invoice price.

C. The invoice was blocked manually because the invoice price was lower than the order price, and the buyer has now changed the price in the purchase order to the invoice price.

D. The invoice was blocked on the entry date due to date variance. The current date is identical to the delivery date of the order item for which the invoice was blocked.

Page 127: Material de Referencia MM

B. 75% C. 67.5% D. 50%

B. Purchasing C. Accounting D. Basic Data E. Forecasting

C. Partner schema D. Partner role

B. Company code C. Plant

C. Schedule lines D. Purchase orders E. Production orders

B. Multiple plants

C. MRP type D. MRP controller

C. Delete status E. Material status

B. The system generates a credit memo.

C. G/L accounts will be newly determined.

D. The system deletes the original invoice document.

B. From the purchasing data in the vendor master record.

C. From the accounting data in the vendor master record.

D. From the first entry in the Customizing table for terms of payment.

B. Vendor subrange

D. Purchasing organization

B. A plant can be assigned to several company codes.

C. A plant can be assigned to a reference purchasing organization.

D. A plant can be assigned to exactly one company code.

B. Purchase requisitions

C. Multiple storage locations of a plant

D. One subcontractor

E. Multiple subcontractors

B. Planned delivery time

C. Requirement lead time

D. Goods receipt processing time

E. Minimum remaining shelf life

B. Exception message

B. A new physical inventory document is created. The new count quantity is entered. When the inventory difference is now posted, all physical inventory documents still to be posted for the material affected are deleted.

C. A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. After the recount, the inventory difference for the old document is posted first, followed by the inventory difference for the new document.

D. A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. The new count quantity is entered in the new physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted.

B. Adjustment status

D. Physical inventory status

B. Quantity counted C. Difference quantity

D. Current plant stock

E. Date on which the difference is to be posted

Page 128: Material de Referencia MM

C. Layout D. Breakdown

C. MRP controller D. Processing status

B. Layout

B. Accounting D. Basic Data

B. Contracts C. Invoicing plans

B. In contracts

B. Maximum difference amount for each Physical Inventory document item

C. Maximum percentage value variance for each Physical Inventory document item

D. Maximum difference amount for each storage location

E. Maximum quantity variance for each Physical Inventory document item

B. The price can be determined from the service conditions.

C. All service lines must have the same account assignment.

D. When the service entry sheet is created only services contained in the purchase order can be entered.

B. Yes, but you have to enter the price in the purchase order manually since it is not copied from the quotation in this case.

C. Yes, you can create the purchase order regardless of the rejection indicator.

D. No, you have to maintain a new quotation first.

B. Selection parameter

B. Creation indicator

C. Personal settings for the transaction

D. Default values in Customizing

C. General Plant Data/Storage

B. In the language defined in the vendor master record

C. In the language of the purchase order header

D. In the language defined in the output determination Customizing settings

D. Contract release orders

B. The item category contains a default value for the invoice receipt indicator in a purchase order item.

C. Any item category can be used in combination with any account assignment category in a purchase order.

D. The name of an item category can be changed in Customizing.

B. The field selection for the account assignment fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category.

C. The field selection for all fields of the purchase order header can be defined based on the account assignment category.

D. New account assignment categories can be created in Customizing.

C. In purchase orders

D. In scheduling agreements

Page 129: Material de Referencia MM

B. EUR 1,026 C. EUR 1,055 D. EUR 1,050

B. 20 C. 30 D. 40

B. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating info records from quotations.

C. The collective number makes it easier to select quotation documents for the price comparison.

D. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating source list entries from quotations.

B. The purchase orders found by the system in the last document search

C. The purchase orders for which you last posted goods receipts

D. The purchase orders with today's date as the delivery date

B. Valuated goods receipt for a purchase order item with a purchase order quantity of 100 pieces. Previous goods movements: Goods receipt of 80 pieces and return delivery to the vendor of 75 pieces.

C. Purchase order item for which a goods receipt was posted to non-valuated GR blocked stock.

D. Purchase order item with account assignment, for which a goods receipt is not planned.

B. Whether the goods receipt for a purchase order item was posted as valuated or non-valuated

C. The total of open items for a vendor in the current invoice

D. Whether there were return deliveries for a purchase order item

E. Whether there is a different invoicing party in the purchase order for this invoice

B. Price determination

C. Message determination

D. Partner determination

B. In the info record at client level

C. In the quota arrangement

D. In the info record at purchasing organization level

B. Outline agreement number for external procurement requirements

C. Vendor for external procurement requirements

D. Info record number for external procurement requirements

B. When creating contracts

C. Using the Mass Maintenance Tool

D. When creating a purchase order

Page 130: Material de Referencia MM

C. Stock account

B. Credit/Debit D. Posting key

C. SAP Help D. Troubleshooting

B. The new price is immediately proposed for all new purchase orders created for the relevant material with the respective vendor.

C. The PO price in the purchase orders that are still open is automatically changed to the new price.

D. Invoice verification automatically receives a message about the price change made.

B. Create purchase order, vendor known

C. Create purchase order, vendor unknown

D. Create purchase requisition

E. Automatic purchase order generation for goods receipt

B. Manually, using the "Change Purchase Requisition" transaction

C. Manually, using collective release

D. Automatically, when purchase requisitions are converted into purchase orders

B. Consumption account

D. Price difference account

B. Goods receipts are always valuated based on the moving average price from the material master record

C. The moving average price is equal to the total value multiplied by total quantity of stock

D. If a purchase requisition is created, the current moving average price is proposed as the valuation price B. Any valuation

class. C. All valuation classes of the valuation grouping code of the used valuation area.

D. The default valuation class from the user parameters.

C. Valuation modification

B. SAP Solution Manager is installed as a component of each of your existing landscapes.

C. SAP Solution Manager is used only for implementing your application.

D. SAP Solution Manager is an add-on industry solution.

B. Management of SAP Notes

B. SAP ERP is a system that contains components for purchasing, sales, materials management, production, and so on.

C. SAP ERP is a planning system in which enhanced planning processes can be represented.

D. SAP ERP is a technology platform that can be used as a basis for implementing customer-specific enhancements.

Page 131: Material de Referencia MM

B. Three C. One D. Any number

B. Accounting D. Basic Data

B. Contracts C. Invoicing plans

B. The portal is an interface for managing variants of frequently-used transactions.

C. The portal is only a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data.

D. The portal buffers all data so that work can continue in the portal if one of the assigned systems fails.

B. Blanket purchase order items require an account assignment to be entered.

C. Blanket purchase orders items can have multiple account assignment.

D. Invoices for blanket purchase orders are always blocked by the system.

B. At least one component must be provided to the subcontractor.

C. Subcontracting orders may not have an account assignment.

D. The price in the purchase order contains both the service provided by the subcontractor and the value of the components.

E. For subcontracting orders, an invoice receipt is binding.

B. The start date of an invoicing plan can be defined at item level.

C. Invoicing plans can be used for stock materials as well as for consumable materials.

D. The invoicing plan type for a purchase order item can be changed retroactively.

C. General Plant Data/Storage

B. In the language defined in the vendor master record

C. In the language of the purchase order header

D. In the language defined in the output determination Customizing settings

D. Contract release orders

B. The item category contains a default value for the invoice receipt indicator in a purchase order item.

C. Any item category can be used in combination with any account assignment category in a purchase order.

D. The name of an item category can be changed in Customizing.

B. The field selection for the account assignment fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category.

C. The field selection for all fields of the purchase order header can be defined based on the account assignment category.

D. New account assignment categories can be created in Customizing.

Page 132: Material de Referencia MM

B. In contracts

B. EUR 1,026 C. EUR 1,055 D. EUR 1,050

B. 20 C. 30 D. 40

C. In purchase orders

D. In scheduling agreements

B. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating info records from quotations.

C. The collective number makes it easier to select quotation documents for the price comparison.

D. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating source list entries from quotations.

B. The purchase orders found by the system in the last document search

C. The purchase orders for which you last posted goods receipts

D. The purchase orders with today's date as the delivery date

B. Valuated goods receipt for a purchase order item with a purchase order quantity of 100 pieces. Previous goods movements: Goods receipt of 80 pieces and return delivery to the vendor of 75 pieces.

C. Purchase order item for which a goods receipt was posted to non-valuated GR blocked stock.

D. Purchase order item with account assignment, for which a goods receipt is not planned.

B. Whether the goods receipt for a purchase order item was posted as valuated or non-valuated

C. The total of open items for a vendor in the current invoice

D. Whether there were return deliveries for a purchase order item

E. Whether there is a different invoicing party in the purchase order for this invoice

B. Price determination

C. Message determination

D. Partner determination

B. In the info record at client level

C. In the quota arrangement

D. In the info record at purchasing organization level

B. Outline agreement number for external procurement requirements

C. Vendor for external procurement requirements

D. Info record number for external procurement requirements

B. When creating contracts

C. Using the Mass Maintenance Tool

D. When creating a purchase order

Page 133: Material de Referencia MM

C. Stock account

B. Credit/Debit D. Posting key

C. SAP Help D. Troubleshooting

B. The new price is immediately proposed for all new purchase orders created for the relevant material with the respective vendor.

C. The PO price in the purchase orders that are still open is automatically changed to the new price.

D. Invoice verification automatically receives a message about the price change made.

B. Create purchase order, vendor known

C. Create purchase order, vendor unknown

D. Create purchase requisition

B. Manually, using the "Change Purchase Requisition" transaction

C. Manually, using collective release

D. Automatically, when purchase requisitions are converted into purchase orders

B. Consumption account

D. Price difference account

B. Goods receipts are always valuated based on the moving average price from the material master record

C. The moving average price is equal to the total value multiplied by total quantity of stock

D. If a purchase requisition is created, the current moving average price is proposed as the valuation price B. Any valuation

class. C. All valuation classes of the valuation grouping code of the used valuation area.

D. The default valuation class from the user parameters.

C. Valuation modification

B. SAP Solution Manager is installed as a component of each of your existing landscapes.

C. SAP Solution Manager is used only for implementing your application.

D. SAP Solution Manager is an add-on industry solution.

B. Management of SAP Notes

B. SAP ERP is a system that contains components for purchasing, sales, materials management, production, and so on.

C. SAP ERP is a planning system in which enhanced planning processes can be represented.

D. SAP ERP is a technology platform that can be used as a basis for implementing customer-specific enhancements.

Page 134: Material de Referencia MM

B. Three C. One D. Any number

FALSE

FALSE

Display Optional Supress

Valuation area Company Code Plant

B. The portal is an interface for managing variants of frequently-used transactions.

C. The portal is only a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data.

D. The portal buffers all data so that work can continue in the portal if one of the assigned systems fails.

B. Blanket purchase order items require an account assignment to be entered.

C. Blanket purchase orders items can have multiple account assignment.

D. Invoices for blanket purchase orders are always blocked by the system.

B. At least one component must be provided to the subcontractor.

C. Subcontracting orders may not have an account assignment.

D. The price in the purchase order contains both the service provided by the subcontractor and the value of the components.

E. For subcontracting orders, an invoice receipt is binding.

B. The start date of an invoicing plan can be defined at item level.

C. Invoicing plans can be used for stock materials as well as for consumable materials.

D. The invoicing plan type for a purchase order item can be changed retroactively.

Multiple Purchasing group can be assigned to a purchasing organization

Purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple company codes

Purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple plants

Purchasing organization can be assigned to storage locations

The field selection when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

The sequence of tabe pages when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

The default settings of the info update indicator in purchase orders for vendors in this account group

The interval of the number assignment (internal or external)

Value contract for material 4711

Value contract with item category W (material group) for aticles of material group 4711

SRM Central contract with item category M (Material unknown) for 100 ton of copier paper of material group 4711

Page 135: Material de Referencia MM

Label are printed

Reorder point On-order stock

Non of the above

Non of the above

Activate the quota arrangement for the relevant material and create a quota arrangement item

Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and enter it as a fixed source of supply

Enter consignment as the special procurement type in the material master record

The goods receip can be posted no earlier than the confirmed delivery date

The full confirmed quantity must be entered in one posting in the system

Only the confirmed quantity can be posted when the goods are received

You create a new valuation class and then change the valuation class of the advergising articles to the new valuation class

You create a new material type then change the material type of the advertising articles to the new material type

You create a new material group and then change the material group of the advertising articles to the new material group

The MRP controller receives a message about over deliveries

The buyer receives a message about the good received

The requisitioner of a refereced purchased requisition receives a message about the good received

Set the indicator for good receipt

Set the indicator for the invoice receipt

Select an account assignment category and assign and account assignment object

Transfer posting between plants that have the same company code

Transfer posting between storage location of one plant on a two step procedure

Transfer posting from GR block stock to unrestricted use stock

Non-valuated goods receipt block stock

Fixed purchase requisition

Changing the material document

Deleting a material document

The open PO quantity is reduce by the GR blocked stock

In the case of valuated materials, an accounting document is generated

The quantity booked into GR blocked stocks is recorded in the PO history

There goods receipts are always non-valuated

The free of charge delivery does not bleong to this form of goods receipt

An initial stock balance entry is an other goods receipt

You can enter a value manually for some of these goods receipts

You must to activate the shelf life expiration date for plant and movement type to use this fuction

If the shelf life expiration date is shorten than the remaining shelf life the system always send a warning message

Page 136: Material de Referencia MM

NO

Cost Center Work Center Production Order Profit Center

Text at the item level

A service entry sheet A material document

storage location to storage location from the same plant

Storege location to storage location from plant A to plant B

can be preplanned via a reservation

can only be made form unrestricted-use stock of plant

is only possible if both materials are managed in the same order unit

The same material type

You reverse the stock removal in the issuing plant and post the scrapping there

You put away the entire quantity to the receiving plant, then the issuing plant post the scrapping

You adjust the stock in transit and put away the remaining quantity in the receiving plant

The materials being transferred must have the same base unit of mature

The materials being transferred must have the same valuation class

The materials being transferred must have the same material group

You must asign the checking rule and the checking goup in the material master record

You can never withdrawal item from storage if the availability check is not enough

You can configure which kind of stock are taken into account for availability check

You use the availability check in reservation

Withdrawal for scrapping

Withdrawal for a cost center

Withdrawal for a reservation

Quality inspection stock

Valuated blocked stock

Non-valuated blocked stock

Good receipt for initial stock entry

Goods receipt to the consignment stock

Goods receipt for a free-of-charge delivery

The quantity and value updates for posting with a movement type

The number range for a material document that is generated when a posting are made

Transaction in which movement time can be used

Vendor delivery note number in the document header

Stock type at item level

A difference invoice from the vendor

The number assignment (number range interval) for the invoice document

The number assignment (number range interval) for the accounting document

Whether the invoice is posted as gross or net

Page 137: Material de Referencia MM

67.50% 100% 75%

Before posting the invoice, you change the payment block indicator in the invoice header to released for payment

Switch to document parking and then save the invoice

Define a tolerance group in the vendor master record of the relevant vendor before posting, so that the invoice is then reduce automatically when posted

From the fist entry in the customizing table for term of payment

From the last invoice form the vendor

From the accounting data in the vendor master record

Invoices that were blocked due to a quantity variance provided that the delivery date has in the meantime been reached

Stochasticaly blocked invoices

Invoices that were blocked due to a price variance provided that the PO price now matches the invoice price

Manually blocked invoices

Stock account for Material A 500 +, Stock Account for Material B 450 +

Freight clearing 875 +

Custom clearing 125+

basic data: posting date, document date, amount, reference, tax code payment: base line date, paymente term, payment method

This function is not possible

You receive and invoice form a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery cost related to a Purchase Order, which has been invoiced

The vendor invoices a quantity higher than delivered for a purchase order in which good receipt is already done

You receive an invoice in foreign currency and the curren exchange rate is higher than the rate expected

The system deletes the original invoice document

The system generates a subsequent debit

GL/Accounts will be newly determined

Page 138: Material de Referencia MM

Invoice date Posting date Reference

Purchasing Forecast Accounting

Plant Client

Plant Partner Role Vendor Sub range

Planned delivery time

purchase requisition Scheduling lines Purchase Order Planned Orders

One plant Multiple plants

MRP type MRP Controller Procurement type

Quantity count Difference quantity Book quantity Current plan stock

Material status Delete status Adjustment status Count status

The unplanned delivery costs are to be split across the invoice items

The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a separate G/L account for unplanned delivery costs

The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a price difference account

The ERS delivery indicator must be set in the vendor master record

The ERS indicator must be set in the purchase order

A tax code must be specified in the order item

Freight conditions cannot be included in the PO price

The vendor invoiced a price lower that a procure order price

For an item that has been delivered, a higher quantity was invoiced than delivered

The vendor has invoiced a price higher than the purchase order price

A Plant can be assigned directly to one controlling area

A plant can be assigned to a reference purchasing organization

A plant can be assigned to several company codes

Material Requierement Planning Run

Purchase organization

Minimum remaining shelf life

Good receipt processing time

Requirement lead time

Multiple subcontractor

Multiple Storage Locations

Page 139: Material de Referencia MM

Language Direction

Purchase order info record

1026 1050 1055

Lay out

The new count quantity is entered in the existing physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted

A new physical inventory document is created. The new count quantity is entered. When the inventory difference is now posted, all physical inventory documents still to be posted for the material affected are deleted

A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. After the recount, the inventory difference for the old document is posted first, followed by the inventory difference for the new document

Maximum difference amount for each physical inventory document item

Maximum quantity variance for each physical inventory document item

Maximum percentage value variance for each physical inventory document item

Maximum difference amount for each storage location

Procurement type (internal, external)

User department (views)

In the language in which you are logged on to the system

In the language defined in the output determination customizing settings

In the language defined in the vendor master record

No, you have to maintain a new quotation first

Yes, you can create the purchase order regardless of the rejection indicator

No, a quotation item for which the rejection indicator is set can not be converted into a purchase order

Scheduling agreement

Default Values in Customizing

Personal settings for the transaction

Page 140: Material de Referencia MM

Creation indicator MEP Controller Requester

NO

Layout Break Down Scope of list

Contracts Delivery Schedules

Requisition Quotation Contract

fiel selection number ranges permissible material

limit asset consignment services

The collective number makes it easier to select quotation documents for the price comparison

The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating info records

The collective number makes it easier to select documents for message output of request for quotation

The account assigment category unknown (U) is allowed only in purchase orders with item category D (Service).

You must specify a limit in a service item.

The service specification of a service item can be structured in a maximum of four hierarchy levels

You cannot specify just one limit in a service item. A service specification with at least one service must exist

When the service sheet is created only services contained in the purchase order can be display

All the services line must have the same account assignment

Unknow account assigment is allowed

Contracts release order

Purchase order item for which a goods receipt was posted to non-valuated GR blocked stock

Purchase order item of the category limit

Valuated good receipt for a purchase order item with a purchase order quantity of 100 pc

Total of open item for a vendor in the current invoice

Whether there is a different invoicing party in the purchase order for this invoice

Whether there were return deliveries for a purchase order item

Whether block invoices exist for a purchase order item

The purchase orders that you recently created

The purchase orders with today´s date as the delivery date

The purchase orders for which you last posted goods receipts

permissible item categories

The field selection for the account assignment fields of a purchase order can be defined base on the account assignment category

The field selection for all fields of the purchase order header can be defined base on the account assignment category

The field selection for all fields of a purchase order item can bedefined base on the account assignment category

Page 141: Material de Referencia MM

Basic data Purchasing Accounting

Aggregation horizon Creation´s JIT

FALSE

Create reservation

Partner determination Price determination

The name of an item category can be changed in customizing

The item category contains a default value for the invoice receipt indicator in a purchase order items

Any item category can be used in combination with an account assignment category in a purchase order

The PO price in the purchase orders that are still open is automatically changed to the new price

Invoice verification automatically receives a message about he price change made

The new price is inmediately proposed for all new purchase orders created for the relevant material with the respective vendor

Activate the schedule agreement

Tolerance limit for quantity changes

When creating info records

When creating a purchase order

When creating contracts

In the quota arragement

In the info record at purchasing organization level

In the info record at client level

Vendor for external procurements requirements

Info record number for external procurement requirements

Plant from which material is procured for stock transfer requirements

You can convert several requisition items from the same vendor to a purchase order. In doing so, requistion items with the same material are automatically combined for one PO item

If the assigned source was blocked after the assigment was made in the source list, it is not possible to convert the relevant requisition item

You can convert SA delivery schedule lines and contract release orders together

Create pruchase order, vendor unknown

Create purchase order, venrdor know

Create purchase requisition

Message determination

Page 142: Material de Referencia MM

30 20 10

not all above

System monitoring

end user training Defining the project scope

The aim of the release strategy is to control transmission of the requisition

You can have just 2 release strategys

The document type of the requisition determines whether the entire requisition is assigned to a release strategy or whether the release strategies are assigned on an item-wise basis

Manually, using the individual release

Automatically, when purchase requistion are converted into a purchase order

Manually, using the change purchase requisition transaction

solution Manager is add-on industry solution

Solution manager is used only for implementing you aplication

Implement SAP Solution

Upgrade SAP solution

Manage Change requests

To provide the tools and content to support the functional and technical implementation of your SAP solutions

To provide the tools to support the implementation and setup of operations of your SAP solutions

To provide the tools and service to support the operations in all available SAP solution

Business process Monitoring

Service level reporting

Business process repository

testing the system to ensure that it meets the specified business requirements

Developping training materials

Page 143: Material de Referencia MM

SAP HELP

material Delivery date plant Quantity

any number three two

electricity bills

Project prepartion, busines blueprint, realization, final preparation, go live and support

Project kick off, configuration blueprint, realizatión, final preparation, support

Project Kick off, business blueprint, realization final preparation, support

The portal buffers all data so that work continue in the portal

the portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different system

The portal is a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data

SAP ERP is a Technology platform that can be used as a basis for implementing customer specific enhacements

SAP ERP is a system that contains components for purchasing, sales, materials, management production an so on

SAP ERP is aplication that company can use to manage its business processes efficiently

Management of SAP notes

Process for menssage processing

Blanket Purchase order item can have multiple account assigment

Blanket purchase order allows non-valuated good receipts only

Blanquet purchase orders items require an account assigment to be entered

You order material for a customer, which is then delivered directly to de customer by the vendor

The vendor must be entered in the material master record as an eligible manufacturer

The vendor must be entered inthe BOM as an eligible manufacturer

Inthe purchase order, use item category L

At leas one component must be provided to the subcontractor

Subcontracting orders may not have a and account assigment

the goods receipt for subcontracting order must always be posted as valuated

The price in the purcharse orders contain the service provided by the supplier

magazine subcriptions

Credit card settlements

Invoicing Plans can be used for stock materials as well as for consumable material

The invoicing plan type for a purcharse order item can be changed retroactively

The start date of an invoicing plan can be defined at item level

If a purchase requisition is created, the current average price is proposed as the valuated price

Price difference posting can happen when posting an invoice receipt

Goods receipts are always valuated based on the moving average price from the material master record

Page 144: Material de Referencia MM

Price difference accouGR/IR Clearing accounstock account

Posting Key Credit / Debit Valuation Modification

No

FALSE

Account grouping cod Item category Valuation Grouping coTransaction

FALSE

FALSE

All valuaion classes of the calculation grouping code of the used valuation area

The default valuation class from the user parameters

All valuation classes from the account category reference assigned to the material type

Page 145: Material de Referencia MM

Test Number

115

37

115 3

115

90

80 63

GA 14

115

61

80 60

GA 11

Page 146: Material de Referencia MM

115 11180 4

115 6

11548

80 34

GA 19

80 7

1159

115 8180 65

GA 16115 23

115110

80 41

11555

115 76

80 8

1157

115 5680 44

11542

115 15

11527

80 19115 86

80 67GA 18

115 4780 35

11513

Page 147: Material de Referencia MM

80 16115 26

80 9GA 5

115 8980 68

115 70

80 30

11534

80 32

115102

80 79

GA 30

80 57

GA 8

11573

115 39115 36

80 2980 2780 26

115 2880 13

115 43115 112

80 74

GA 25115 99115 57115 94

11585

Page 148: Material de Referencia MM

115 4

115113

115 114115 63

80 56GA 7

80 70GA 21

115 107115 96115 51

80 38115 30

80 20115 11

80 1880 14

11572

115 29

80 59

GA 10115 64

80 48115 77

80 53GA 4

115 80115 53

80 43115 2

80 180 23

115 3280 78

GA 29115 104115 40

80 31115 83

80 64

Page 149: Material de Referencia MM

GA 1580 75

GA 26115 12

80 10115 98

115101

80 77

GA 28115 67

80 45115 24

11565

80 55GA 6

115 6080 62

GA 13115 82115 20

80 3680 2

115 45115 1115 106

80 80GA 31

115 7480 3

11544

115 5

80 25115 95115 92115 100115 14

80 1180 15

115 9180 73

GA 24

Page 150: Material de Referencia MM

80 76GA 27

115 66115 93115 17115 105115 19

80 52GA 3

115 69

11550

80 3780 72

GA 23115 109115 75

80 54115 18115 103115 88115 54

80 42115 97

80 39115 49115 22

11541

80 24115 115

80 71GA 22

115 31

80 28

11538

11559

11546

80 33

Page 151: Material de Referencia MM

11579

80 66

GA 17

11558

80 51GA 2

11571

80 58

GA 9

80 46

11535

11552

80 40

11516

115108

80 69

GA 20

80 21

80 5

1158

Page 152: Material de Referencia MM

80 22

115

33

11562

80 49

11521

80 17

80 61

GA 12

11587

80 47

11568

11578

80 50

GA 1

11525

80 12

11584

115

10

80 6

Page 153: Material de Referencia MM

Question

A purchasing organization must always be assigned to a company code

A Purchase order has been issued on a vendor for two materials, 150 units of material A has been ordered at 4 uni/pc, 20 units of material B has been ordered at 45 UNI/pc. The vendor has supplied all the materials. The invoice for the supply has been received and posted. He now sends an invoice that includes 825 eur as freight charges and 125 eur as custom duty that was not planned. The system has been configured to distribute delivery costs amongst items. How will the cost be apportioned when the invoice is posted?

A release stategy for a purchase reqisition is defined as follows: Account aassigment category (blank), Plant (1000 or 1100) purchasing group (001), Material (m-01), Valutaion price (>200), quantity (>50). For next lines:

Item 10, AAC (blank), material =m-01, quantity 1, plant (1000), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

Item 20, AAC (blank), material =m-01, quantity 100, plant (1000), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

Item 30, AAC (K), material =m-01, quantity 100, plant (1100), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

Item 40, AAC (blank), material =m-01, quantity 1, plant (1200), purcase group =001, valuation price =500.

For which purchase requisition item will this stategy be determinated?A release strategy for purchase requisition is defined as follows: -Account Assignment Category " " (blank) -Plant 1000 or 1100 -Purchasing Group 001 =- Item value. > 1000 For which purchase requisition item (see graphic) will this strategy be determined?

A release strategy for purchase requisition is defined as follows: Account Assignment Category " " (blank) -Plant 1000 or 1100 -Purchasing Group 001 =- Item value. > 1000 For which purchase requisition item (see graphic) will this strategy be determined?

A vendor offer you a mateial at the gross price of 1000 EUR in addition the vendor give you 10% discount and 5% cash discount and absolute freight amount 200. What is the EFECTIVE PRICE.

Level 1 Condition type = PB01, Description = gross price, from (blank)Level 10, Condition type RB01, Description = Discount %, from = 1Level 15, Condition type= ZC01, Description=Sub charge %, from = 1Level 20, , Description = NET VALUELevel 30, Condition type = FRB01, Description = Absolute freight amount, from =20Level 35, Condition type = SKTO, Description = Cash discount, from = 20Level 40, , Description = EFECTIVE PRICE

A vendor offers you a material at the gross price of EUR 1,000. In addition, the vendor gives you a 10% discount and a 5% cash discount. The vendor charges EUR 200 for freight costs. What is the effective price if you use the calculation schema below?

A vendor offers you a material at the gross price of EUR 1,000. In addition, the vendor gives you a 10% discount and a 5% cash discount. The vendor charges EUR 200 for freight costs. What is the effective price if you use the calculation schema below?

Page 154: Material de Referencia MM

Account determination always takes place on a plant dependent basisAt what level can you set quantity and value updating on a material type?

At what level can you set quantity and value updating on material type

Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries?Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries? (Choose two.)

Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries? (Choose two.)

Can you change reservation created automatically

Flag which ones are item categories

For posting inventory differences, you can define tolerance group. What tolerance can you define?

For which functions can you use transaction Migo

For which of the following transaction can the source of supply be determinated automatically?For which of the following transactions can the source of supply be determined automatically? (Choose two.)

For which of the following transactions can the source of supply be determined automatically? (Choose two.)

For Which organizational levels can you maintain the material status in material master recordFor which organizational levels can you maintain the material status in material master records? (Choose two.)

At what level in the vendor master record is it possible to define purchasing data that is different from that which is maintained at client levelAt what level in the vendor master record is it possible to define purchasing data that is different from that which is maintained at the purchasing organization level? (Choose two.) Automatic purchase order generation for goods receipt .How can blocked purchase requisitions be released? (Choose two.) Before deliveries arrive from certain vendors, you want to be informed of the delivery date and quantity. To do this, you use a confirmation control key. Which of the following settings can you define in a confirmation control key? Before deliveries arrive from certain vendors, you want to be informed of the delivery date and quantity. Which of the following settings can you define in a confirmation control key?

Does the movement type with which a goods receipt is recorded have any influence on the G/L accounts of the GR postingDuring a physical inventory, the warehouse manager has decided to have the quantity of a material recounted for a physical inventory document. How is a recount processed in the system?

During the physical inventory, the warehouse manager has decided to have a quantity of a material recounted for a physical inventory document. How is a recounted processed in the system?

For a material without a material master record, a source of supply is to be found when a purchase requisition is created. You request 10 pallets of copier paper belonging to material group 4711. Which of the following sources of supply is proposed by the system?

For a material without material master record, a source of supply is to be found when a purchase requisition is created. Which of the following source of supply is proposed by the system

For posting inventory differences, you can define tolerance groups. What tolerances can you define? (Choose two.) For the evaluated receipt settlement, the following prerequisite must be fulfilled (Automatic Invoice verification)

For which of the following objects can you post a good issue directly from the valuated stock using a standard movement typeFor which of the following objects can you post a goods issue directly from the valuated stock using a standard movement type? (Choose three.)

For which transfer posting can an account document be generated if the postings are made with a valuated material

Page 155: Material de Referencia MM

From which stock type can goods issues to cost center be postedFrom which stock type can goods issues to cost centers be posted?

hich settings can be made for account assignment categories? (Choose two.)

How can block purchase requisition be released?How can blocked purchase requisitions be released? (Choose two.)

How can you give maintenance to a purchasing info record.

In which cases you have to enter a subsequent debit in a logitics invoice verificationIn which of the following cases can invoices be released automaticallyIn which of the following cases can invoices be released automatically? (Choose two.)

In which of the following cases is the good receipt always posted as non- valuatedIn which of the following cases is the goods receipt always posted as non-valuated?

Select 4 things what the material type controlSolution Monitoring consists of the which tree components

For which transfer postings can an accounting document be generated if the postings are made with a valuated material? (Choose two.)

In Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification, the following values are defined for the stochastic block: Threshold value. 10000 Percentage. 50 You enter an invoice with a value of 15000. What is the probability that the invoice will be blocked stochastically?

In Logistics Invoice Verification form where does the system determine the terms of payment for invoices with out POIn Logistics Invoice Verification, from where does the system determine the terms of payment for invoices without a purchase order reference?

In the feature, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51NIn the future, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. To do this, they are to access catalogs directly from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N?

In the future, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. To do this, they are to access catalogs directly from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N?

In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the "My documents" overview. Which documents are displayed under "Purchase Orders"? In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the "My documents" overview. Which documents are displayed under "Purchase Orders"?

In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the my documents overview. Which documents are displayed under Purchase Orders

In which of the following cases do you have to enter a subsequent debit in Logistics Invoice Verification? In which of the following cases do you have to maintain GR/IR clearing accounts in Logistics Invoice Verification?

In which of the following cases you have to maintain GR/IR clearing account in Logistics Inovice VerificationMention what are the principal and direct factor to determine the automatic account determinationSAP Solution Manager contains the Service Desk function. What functions does the Service Desk provide? (Choose two.) SAP Solution Manager contains the Service Desk function. What functions does the Service Desk provide? (Choose two.) SAP Solution Manager contains the service desk funtion. What funtion does the service desk provide?

The source determination in a purchase requistion finds a source of supply is the next sequence: 1 Quota Arrangement; 2 Source List, 3 Outline Agreement, 4 Info Record. This is true or false

Page 156: Material de Referencia MM

The storage location key 0001 may be used multiple times

Value strings can be changed and extended en each company according to particular requirementsWhat advantage does the collective number have in request for quatations?What advantage does the collective number have in requests for quotations?

What advantage does the collective number have in requests for quotations?

What are characteristics of material valuation at the moving average price? (Choose two.)

What are characteristics of material valuation at the moving average price? (Choose two.)

what are characteristitics of material valuation at the moving averange price?What are the five phases of the implementation roadmap?What can an MRP area include?What can an MRP area include? (Choose three.)

What can be changed in a material document after it has been postedWhat can be changed in a material document after it has been posted?

What can be triggered by a good receipt posting?What can be triggered by a goods receipt posting? (Choose three.)

What can you define for a movement type in Customizing? (Choose two.)

What can you defined in a movement type in Customizing

What can you use to determine the origin of a purchase requisition?What can you use to determine the origin of a purchase requisition?

What characterizes an item category in purchasingWhat characterizes an item category in purchasing? (Choose two.)

What characterizes an item category in purchasing? (Choose two.)

What control the creation profile in the scheduling agreementWhat data is display in the list of inventory differences?What data is displayed in the list of inventory differences? (Choose three.)

What does an account group determine when vendor master records are created?What does an account group determine when vendor master records are created? (Choose three.)

What does the document type control when an invoice is entered? (Choose two.)

What does the documet type control when an invoice is entered?What features do subcontracting orders (item category L) have? (Choose two.)

What features do subcontracting orders (item category L) have? (Choose two.)

what features do the subcontracting order have?What happens when you cancel invoices in logistics invoice verification?What happens when you cancel invoices in Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

What information can you specify in a quota arrangement?What information can you specify in a quota arrangement? (Choose two.)

To be able to use production planning (component PP) material valuation must be set up at company code level

What can you defined from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (enter invoice)

What can you derive from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (Enter Invoice)? (Choose two.) What can you derive from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (Enter Invoice)? (Choose two.)

Page 157: Material de Referencia MM

What information can you specify in a quota arrangement? (Choose two.)

What is "SAP ERP"?

What is "SAP ERP"? What is mandatory in a purchase order for a non-valuated material?What is mandatory in a purchase order for a non-valuated material? What is SAP ERP

What special features apply to purchase orders of services (item category D)What special features apply to purchase orders of services (item category D)? (Choose two.) What statements are true about dynamic availability check

Where are only time-independent conditions defined for the procurement process? Where are only time-independent conditions defined for the procurement process? Where are only time-independet condition defined for the procurement processWhere can you maintain the regular vendor? Where can you maintain the regular vendor? Where can you mantain the regular vendor?Which are the statement about transfer posting material to materialWhich assignment can be made for the organizational object "plant"? Which assignment can be made for the organizational object "purchasing organization".? Which assignment can be made for the organizational object plant?Which assignment can be made for the organizational object purchase organization?Which attributes do invoicing plans have?Which attributes do invoicing plans have? (Choose two.) Which attributes do invoicing plans have? (Choose two.) Which control the document typeWhich field attribute is given the highest priority in the field selection control?

Which fields attribute is given highest priority in the field selection control

Which of the following activites would occur in phase 3? Select the correct answerswhich of the following are solution Manager Usage scenarios?Which of the following do you enter when you create a blanket purchase orderWhich of the following elements belong to warehouse stock available for MRP in net requirement

Which of the following is a prerequisite for transfer postings between two materials ("material to material")? Which of the following statements about SAP solution Manager is correctWhich of the following statements about SAP Solution Manager is correct? Which of the following statements about SAP Solution Manager is correct?

What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparation with standart purchase orderWhat special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparison to a standard purchase order (standard item category)? What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparison to a standard purchase order (standard item category)?

When do you service entry sheets are saved, the material document is created and when the service entry sheet are approve, postings are made in financial accounting. It is true or false

Which field can you include in the check for duplicate invoices in customizing for logistic invoice verification

Which fields can you include in the check for duplicate invoices in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

Which of the following elements belong to warehouse stock available for MRP in net requirement calculation? (Choose three.)

Page 158: Material de Referencia MM

Which of the following statements applies to the Enterprise Portal? Which of the following statements applies to the Enterprise Portal? Which of the following statements are correct in servicesWhich of the following statements best describes the purpose of the SAP Solution ManagerWhich of the following statements regarding other goods receipts is correctWhich operations are periodic invoincing plans suitable for?Which procedures can generate an accounting documentWhich procurement element can be created in Purchasing with automatic purchase order generation? Which procurement element can be created in Purchasing with automatic purchase order generation?

Which rule can be selected in account determination for Inventory postings (Transaction BSX)? Which rule can be selected in account determination for Inventory postings (Transaction BSX)? Which rules you can be selected in account determination for Inventory postingWhich settings can be made for account assigment categories?Which settings can be made for account assignment categories? (Choose two.) Which statements about shelf life expiration date check are correctWhich statements about the subcontracting process are correctWhich statements regarding the release of a purchase requisitionWhich statuses are updated at header level in a physical inventory documentWhich statuses are updated at header level in a physical inventory document? (Choose three.) Which the following statements applies to the enterprise portal

Which times belongs to replenishment lead time in the planning run for the external procurementWhich to the following is a prerequisite for transfer postings between two materials

Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materialsWhich valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials? Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials?

Which procurement elements can be created in purchasing with automatic purchase order generationWhich procurement elements can be generated in the material requirement planning run for a material that is externally procuredWhich procurement elements can be generated in the material requirements planning run for a material that is procured only externally? (Choose three.)

Which times belong to the replenishment lead time in the planning run for an externally procured material? (Choose three.)

Which two options can you define in customizing for logistics invoice verification to manage unplanned delivery costWhich two options can you define in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification to manage unplanned delivery costs for invoice receipts? (Choose two.)

With reference to which of the following objects can you enter an invoice in Logistic Invoice VerificationWith reference to which of the following objects can you enter an invoice in Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.) Write what are the information that you need to allocate in the invoice verification to post invoices without reference to Purchase OrderYou can set the rejection indicator in the quotation item. Can you still create a Purchase Order with reference to this quotation item?You can use profile to help you enter data in material master record. For which user departments are profile availableYou can use profiles to help you enter data in material master records. For which user departments are profiles available? (Choose two.)

Page 159: Material de Referencia MM

You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that apply the info record. What happens when the price is chaged in the info recordYou change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that are open for delivery from the relevant vendor. What happens when the price is changed in the info record? You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that are open for delivery from the relevant vendor. What happens when the price is changed in the info record?

You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed? You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed? You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are already selected when you call the purchse order. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system?

You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are selected while others are not. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system? (Choose two.) You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are selected while others are not. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system? (Choose two.) You have set the rejection indicator in a quotation item. Can you still create a purchase order with reference to this quotation item?

You have set up the stochastic check in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification as follows: At a threshold value of 10,000 euros, there is a 50% likelihood of an invoice being blocked. What is the likelihood of an invoice with a value of 15,000 Euros being blockedYou perform a total planning run for a plant. On the initial screen, you can select a creation indicator for MRP list. Which of the following can determine whether an MRP list is created for a materialYou perform a total planning run for a plant. On the initial screen, you can select a creation indicator for MRP lists. Which of the following can determine whether an MRP list is created for a material?

You post a goods receipt to the non-valuated GR blocked stock movement type 103. What are the effects of this?

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purcharse order. The material has the material master record and account assigment category = K (cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L account were the posting made??

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purchase order. The material has a material master record and a material type for which quantity and value are updated. The purchase order item has the account assignment category K (= cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L accounts were the postings made? (Choose two.)

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purchase order. The material has a material master record and a material type for which quantity and value are updated. The purchase order item has the account assignment category K (= cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L accounts were the postings made? (Choose two.)

You post an invoice with unplanned delivery costs. These costs should be posted in full to the stock account of a material. What prerequisites must be met to achieve this? (Choose two.) You procure a material using the "Consignment" process. You want to ensure that purchase requisitions with the "Consignment" item category are generated automatically for requirements in requirements planning. Which of the following settings allows you to do this? (Choose two.)

You procure a material using the consignment process. You want to ensure that purchase requisition created is going to used to this purpose

Page 160: Material de Referencia MM

You receive an invoice from a vendor for a material to the amount of EUR 1,000 for 100 pieces. After you have entered the header data and the purchase order number, the system proposes a quantity of 70 pieces and an amount of EUR 700 from the goods receipt postings. How can you enter the invoice in the system without it being blocked for payment? (Choose two.)

You received an invoice from a vendor for a material to the amount of 1000 euro, for 100 pieces. After you have entered the header data and the purchase order number, the system proposes a quantity of 70 and an amount of 700 euro, from the good receipt postings. How can you enter the invoice in the system without it being blocked for paymentYou set up the document overview in the Enjoy SAP purchase order (transaction ME21N). What setting allows you to sort document by vendor first then by document number within vendor numberYou set up the document overview in the Enjoy SAP purchase order (transaction ME21N). What setting allows you to sort documents by vendor first and then by document number within a vendor?

You transfer material between two plants. During the transport process some part are damage. How can you post this as scrapping?You transfer material between two plants. During the transport process, some parts are damaged so badly that they have to be scrapped. How you can you post this as scrapping? (Choose two.) You want to convert purchase requisitions into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this? You want to convert purchase requisitions into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

You want to convert purchase requisitons into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?You want to create a list of all purchase orders for which you have not yet received an invoice. What can you use to find these specific purchase orders when entering your criteria for the search query?

You want to create a list of purchase order for which you have not received an invoice. What can you use to find these specific pruchase orders when entering your criteria for the search screenYou want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimumYou want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum? (Choose two.) You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum? (Choose two.)

You want to post a goods issue from stock in quality inspection in which of the following cases is this possibleYou want to post a goods issue from stock in quality inspection. In which of the following cases is this possible? (Choose two.)

You would like to convert assigned purchase requisitions into follow-on documents. Which of the following statements apply?Your company manage stock of various advertising articles on a quantity and value basis in the future you want to analyze the value of this advertising articles.Unfortunately, the articles has been classified with different materia type, material groups, valuations classes, and in different number range intervals for this reason you want to change the assignment.Which of the following changes are possible, even if stock exist for the articles?Your company manages stock of various advertising articles on a quantity and value basis. In the future, you want to analyze the value of these advertising articles. Unfortunately, the articles have been created with different material types, material groups, valuation classes, and in different number range intervals. For this reason, you want to change the assignments. Which of the following changes are possible, even if stock exists for the articles?

Page 161: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Question 1 2 3 4 5

115 Freight clearing 875 + Custom clearing 125+

115 TRUE FALSE

115 40 30 20 10

115 1045 1026 1050 1055

115 Verdadero FALSE

80 A. Plant B. Company code C. Valuation area D. Procurement type

115 partner schema Plant Partner Role Vendor Sub range

A At which organization level do you maintain source list ? Client Company code Plant Purchasing organization

GA

80

115 Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries? When creating contracts

115 Can you change reservation created automatically YES NO

A

115 Yes No

A Purchase order has been issued on a vendor for two materials, 150 units of material A has been ordered at 4 uni/pc, 20 units of material B has been ordered at 45 UNI/pc. The vendor has supplied all the materials. The invoice for the supply has been received and posted. He now sends an invoice that includes 825 eur as freight charges and 125 eur as custom duty that was not planned. The system has been configured to distribute delivery costs amongst items. How will the cost be apportioned when the invoice is posted?

Stock account for material A 380 + Stock account for Material B 570 +

Stock account for Material A 500 +, Stock Account for Material B 450 +

A purchasing organization must always be assigned to a company code

A release stategy for a purchase reqisition is defined as follows: Account aassigment category (blank), Plant (1000 or 1100) purchasing group (001), Material (m-01), Valutaion price (>200), quantity (>50). For next lines: For which purchase requisition item will this stategy be determinated?

A vendor offer you a mateial at the gross price of 1000 EUR in addition the vendor give you 10% discount and 5% cash discount and absolute freight amount 200. What is the EFECTIVE PRICE.Account determination always takes place on a plant dependent basisAt what level can you set quantity and value updating on a material type? At what level in the vendor master record is it possible to define purchasing data that is different from that which is maintained at client level

Automatic purchase order generation for goods receipt .How can blocked purchase requisitions be released? (Choose two.)

A. Manually, using individual release

B. Manually, using the "Change Purchase Requisition" transaction

C. Manually, using collective release

D. Automatically, when purchase requisitions are converted into purchase orders

Before deliveries arrive from certain vendors, you want to be informed of the delivery date and quantity. To do this, you use a confirmation control key. Which of the following settings can you define in a confirmation control key?

A. Only the confirmed quantity can be posted when the goods are received.

B. Confirmations must be transmitted electronically.

C. The goods receipt can be posted no earlier than the confirmed delivery date.

D. The full confirmed quantity must be entered in one posting in the system.

Using the mass maintenance tool

When creating info records

When creating a purchase order

Deliveries Often arrive too late. You therefore want to send remainders to your vendor. Which prerequisites must be fulfilled to generates remainders for purchase order item ?

The purcharse order item has no account assigment category.

The delivery date is at least one week in the past

You have entered at least one remainder level in the purcharse order item.

the purchase order must be output.

Does the movement type with which a goods receipt is recorded have any influence on the G/L accounts of the GR posting

Page 162: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Question 1 2 3 4 5

80

115 Flag which ones are item categories cost center limit asset consignment services

115

115

115 For which functions can you use transaction Migo Creating reservations Non of the above

80A. Cost center B. Profit center C. Production order E. Work center

GA A. Create reservation

80 A. Client B. Company code C. Plant

80

115 From which stock type can goods issues to cost center be posted Unrestricted-use stock Quality inspection stock Valuated blocked stock

80

115 How can you give maintenance to a purchasing info record. PO Requisition Quotation Contract

A

80

A. 100% B. 75% C. 67.5% D. 50%

80

During a physical inventory, the warehouse manager has decided to have the quantity of a material recounted for a physical inventory document. How is a recount processed in the system?

A. The new count quantity is entered in the existing physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted.

B. A new physical inventory document is created. The new count quantity is entered. When the inventory difference is now posted, all physical inventory documents still to be posted for the material affected are deleted.

C. A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. After the recount, the inventory difference for the old document is posted first, followed by the inventory difference for the new document.

D. A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. The new count quantity is entered in the new physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted.

For posting inventory differences, you can define tolerance group. What tolerance can you define?

Maximum difference amount for each physical inventory document

Maximum difference amount for each physical inventory document item

Maximum quantity variance for each physical inventory document item

Maximum percentage value variance for each physical inventory document item

Maximum difference amount for each storage location

For the evaluated receipt settlement, the following prerequisite must be fulfilled (Automatic Invoice verification)

The purchase order must be created automatically

The ERS delivery indicator must be set in the vendor master record

The ERS indicator must be set in the purchase order

A tax code must be specified in the order item

Freight conditions cannot be included in the PO price

Changing the material document

Deleting a material document

For which of the following objects can you post a goods issue directly from the valuated stock using a standard movement type? (Choose three.)

D. Project (= WBS element)

For which of the following transactions can the source of supply be determined automatically? (Choose two.)

B. Create purchase order, vendor known

C. Create purchase order, vendor unknown

D. Create purchase requisition

For which organizational levels can you maintain the material status in material master records? (Choose two.)

D. Purchasing organization

For which transfer postings can an accounting document be generated if the postings are made with a valuated material? (Choose two.)

A. Transfer postings from GR blocked stock to unrestricted-use stock

B. Transfer postings between plants that have the same company code

C. Transfer postings from unrestricted-use stock to quality inspection stock

D. Transfer postings between two storage locations of one plant based on a two-step procedure

Non-valuated blocked stock

How can blocked purchase requisitions be released? (Choose two.)

A. Manually, using individual release

B. Manually, using the "Change Purchase Requisition" transaction

C. Manually, using collective release

D. Automatically, when purchase requisitions are converted into purchase orders

In a vendor master record , you enter a different vendor as a partner with partner role (partner funtion) Invoicing party. What is the funtion of this partner role in Materials Management ?

This partner is proposed when you enter an invoice with reference to purchase order.

All unplanned delivery costs with reference to purchase order are billed to this partner.

This partner automatically received copies for all message relating to purcharse document.

Return deliveries with reference to purchase orders must be send to this partner.

In Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification, the following values are defined for the stochastic block: Threshold value. 10000 Percentage. 50 You enter an invoice with a value of 15000. What is the probability that the invoice will be blocked stochastically? In Logistics Invoice Verification, from where does the system determine the terms of payment for invoices without a purchase order reference?

A. From the last invoice for the vendor.

B. From the purchasing data in the vendor master record.

C. From the accounting data in the vendor master record.

D. From the first entry in the Customizing table for terms of payment.

Page 163: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Question 1 2 3 4 5

80

A. Two B. Three C. One D. Any number

GA

115

80

80

80

80

A Client Company code Purchasing organization

115 Valuation class Account grouping code Item category Valuation Grouping code Transaction

A

GA C. SAP Help D. Troubleshooting

115 Select 4 things what the material type control Number Range User department (views) Language Direction

115 Solution Monitoring consists of the which tree components SAP service marketplace Service level reporting System monitoring

A

In the future, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. To do this, they are to access catalogs directly from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N?

In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the "My documents" overview. Which documents are displayed under "Purchase Orders"?

A. The purchase orders that you recently created

B. The purchase orders found by the system in the last document search

C. The purchase orders for which you last posted goods receipts

D. The purchase orders with today's date as the delivery date

In which cases you have to enter a subsequent debit in a logitics invoice verification

You received and invoice from a forwarding agent or unplanned delivery cost related to a delivery that it is not invoiced

You receive and invoice form a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery cost related to a Purchase Order, which has been invoiced

The vendor invoices a quantity higher than delivered for a purchase order in which good receipt is already done

You receive an invoice in foreign currency and the curren exchange rate is higher than the rate expected

In which of the following cases can invoices be released automatically? (Choose two.)

A. The invoice was blocked stochastically.

B. The invoice was blocked due to a price variance, and the buyer has now changed the price in the purchase order to the invoice price.

C. The invoice was blocked manually because the invoice price was lower than the order price, and the buyer has now changed the price in the purchase order to the invoice price.

D. The invoice was blocked on the entry date due to date variance. The current date is identical to the delivery date of the order item for which the invoice was blocked.

In which of the following cases do you have to enter a subsequent debit in Logistics Invoice Verification?

A. The vendor invoices a quantity higher than delivered for a purchase order item in which goods-receipt-based invoice verification is flagged.

B. You receive an invoice in foreign currency and the current exchange rate is higher than the rate specified in the purchase order.

C. You receive an invoice from a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery costs related to a purchase order item already invoiced.

D. You receive an invoice from a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery costs related to a delivery completed purchase order.

In which of the following cases do you have to maintain GR/IR clearing accounts in Logistics Invoice Verification?

A. The vendor has invoiced a price higher than the purchase order price.

B. You have posted an invoice incorrectly and canceled it afterwards.

C. For an item that has been delivered, a higher quantity was invoiced than delivered.

D. The vendor has invoiced a price lower than the purchase order price.

In which of the following cases is the goods receipt always posted as non-valuated?

A. Goods receipt for initial stock entry

B. Goods receipt to the stock of material provided to vendor

C. Goods receipt for a free-of-charge delivery

D. Goods receipt to the consignment stock

Info records can have texts for differents organizational levels. For which levels can you maintain these texts ??

Purchasing Organization in cobination with a Plant

Mention what are the principal and direct factor to determine the automatic account determination

Ocasionally a vendor delivers a goods witout a purchase order. You want the system to create a purcharse order for such deliveries automatically when a good receipt is posted. What are the prerequisites for this scenario ?

Automatic purchase order creation must be allowed for the movement type wich you post the good receipt

Automatic purchase order creation must be allowed for the plant and storege location to which you post the good receipt.

A reference purcharse organization must be assigned to the plant to which you post the good receipt

A standars purcharse organization must be assigned to the plant to which you post the good receipt.

SAP Solution Manager contains the Service Desk function. What functions does the Service Desk provide? (Choose two.)

A. Process for message processing

B. Management of SAP Notes Procurement type (internal, external)Business process Monitoring

Business process repository

The book quantity of a material is 100. the inventory count result is 0. How do you handle this count in a physical inventory document

You enter 0 in quantity field

You post a good issue with quantity 100.

You deleted the item from the physical inventory document.

You set the ZERO count indicator.

Page 164: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Question 1 2 3 4 5

115 TRUE FALSE

115 The storage location key 0001 may be used multiple times TRUE FALSE

115 Verdadero FALSE

115 Verdadero FALSE

GA

GA

115 What are the five phases of the implementation roadmap?

80 What can an MRP area include? (Choose three.) A. One plant B. Multiple plants D. One subcontractor

80

80

D. Labels are printed.

80

GA

A Incoterms Mininum order quantity Terms of payments.

A

80 A. Requester B. Creation indicator C. MRP controller D. Processing status

The source determination in a purchase requistion finds a source of supply is the next sequence: 1 Quota Arrangement; 2 Source List, 3 Outline Agreement, 4 Info Record. This is true or false

To be able to use production planning (component PP) material valuation must be set up at company code levelValue strings can be changed and extended en each company according to particular requirementsWhat advantage does the collective number have in requests for quotations?

A. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for message output of requests for quotations.

B. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating info records from quotations.

C. The collective number makes it easier to select quotation documents for the price comparison.

D. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating source list entries from quotations.

What are characteristics of material valuation at the moving average price? (Choose two.)

A. Price difference postings can happen when posting an invoice receipt

B. Goods receipts are always valuated based on the moving average price from the material master record

C. The moving average price is equal to the total value multiplied by total quantity of stock

D. If a purchase requisition is created, the current moving average price is proposed as the valuation price

Project preparation, configuration blue print, realization, final publish, go live and support

Project prepartion, busines blueprint, realization, final preparation, go live and support

Project kick off, configuration blueprint, realizatión, final preparation, support

Project Kick off, business blueprint, realization final preparation, support

C. Multiple storage locations of a plant

E. Multiple subcontractors

What can be changed in a material document after it has been posted?

A. The vendor delivery note number in the document header

B. The quantity at item level

C. The stock type at item level

D. The text at item level

What can be triggered by a goods receipt posting? (Choose three.)

A. The buyer receives a message about the goods received.

B. The requisitioner of a referenced purchase requisition receives a message about the goods received.

C. For stock material, the total quantity and total value are recalculated in the material master record.

E. The MRP controller receives a message about overdeliveries.

What can you define for a movement type in Customizing? (Choose two.)

A. The transactions in which a movement type can be used

B. The reversal movement types for a movement type

C. The quantity and value updates for postings with a movement type

D. The number range for material documents that are generated when postings are made with a movement type

What can you derive from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (Enter Invoice)? (Choose two.)

A. Whether blocked invoices exist for a purchase order item

B. Whether the goods receipt for a purchase order item was posted as valuated or non-valuated

C. The total of open items for a vendor in the current invoice

D. Whether there were return deliveries for a purchase order item

E. Whether there is a different invoicing party in the purchase order for this invoice

What can you maintain in vendor master record as well as info record.

Tolerances for undeliveries and overdeliveries

What can you specify when you assign a message schema to an application in Purchasing ?

the number of outputs for prints message

the access secuence for the message types in this application

the allowed mediums for outputs, for example print output or fax.

that a new message determination process is initiated for a change message.

What can you use to determine the origin of a purchase requisition?

Page 165: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Question 1 2 3 4 5

GA

115 Delivery Date Aggregation horizon Creation´s JIT

80 A. Book quantity B. Quantity counted C. Difference quantity D. Current plant stock

80

80

GA

80

GA

GA

What is "SAP ERP"?

80

GA

80

115 What statements are true about dynamic availability check

What characterizes an item category in purchasing? (Choose two.)

A. New item categories can be created in Customizing.

B. The item category contains a default value for the invoice receipt indicator in a purchase order item.

C. Any item category can be used in combination with any account assignment category in a purchase order.

D. The name of an item category can be changed in Customizing.

What control the creation profile in the scheduling agreement

Activate the schedule agreement

Tolerance limit for quantity changes

What data is displayed in the list of inventory differences? (Choose three.)

E. Date on which the difference is to be posted

What does an account group determine when vendor master records are created? (Choose three.)

A. The number range in which a vendor master record must be created for this account group

B. The default setting of the info update indicator in purchase orders for vendors in this account group

C. The field selection when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

D. The interval of the number assignment (internal or external)

E. The sequence of tab pages when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

What does the document type control when an invoice is entered? (Choose two.)

A. The number assignment (number range interval) for the invoice document

B. The number assignment (number range interval) for the accounting document

C. Whether the invoice is posted as gross or net

D. Whether the invoice is blocked for payment when posted

What features do subcontracting orders (item category L) have? (Choose two.)

A. The goods receipt for a subcontracting order must always be posted as valuated.

B. At least one component must be provided to the subcontractor.

C. Subcontracting orders may not have an account assignment.

D. The price in the purchase order contains both the service provided by the subcontractor and the value of the components.

E. For subcontracting orders, an invoice receipt is binding.

What happens when you cancel invoices in Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

A. The system generates a subsequent debit.

B. The system generates a credit memo.

C. G/L accounts will be newly determined.

D. The system deletes the original invoice document.

What information can you specify in a quota arrangement? (Choose two.)

A. Plant from which material is procured for stock transfer requirements

B. Outline agreement number for external procurement requirements

C. Vendor for external procurement requirements

D. Info record number for external procurement requirements

A. SAP ERP is an application that a company can use to manage its business processes efficiently.

B. SAP ERP is a system that contains components for purchasing, sales, materials management, production, and so on.

C. SAP ERP is a planning system in which enhanced planning processes can be represented.

D. SAP ERP is a technology platform that can be used as a basis for implementing customer-specific enhancements. What is mandatory in a purchase order for a non-valuated

material? A. Set the indicator for goods receipt.

B. Select an account assignment category and assign an account assignment object.

C. Set the indicator for non-valuated goods receipts.

D. Set the indicator for invoice receipt.

What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparison to a standard purchase order (standard item category)?

A. Blanket purchase orders allow non-valuated goods receipts only.

B. Blanket purchase order items require an account assignment to be entered.

C. Blanket purchase orders items can have multiple account assignment.

D. Invoices for blanket purchase orders are always blocked by the system.

What special features apply to purchase orders of services (item category D)? (Choose two.)

A. Unknown account assignment is allowed.

B. The price can be determined from the service conditions.

C. All service lines must have the same account assignment.

D. When the service entry sheet is created only services contained in the purchase order can be entered.

You can not configure the message (warning or error)

You must asign the checking rule and the checking goup in the material master record

You can never withdrawal item from storage if the availability check is not enough

You can configure which kind of stock are taken into account for availability check

You use the availability check in reservation

J75
Claudia Rodriguez: Buscar en gestion de stock
Page 166: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Question 1 2 3 4 5

115 YES NO

GA B. In contracts C. In purchase orders

GAWhere can you maintain the regular vendor?

115 The same material type

80

80

GA

Which attributes do invoicing plans have? (Choose two.)

115 Which control the document type account determination fiel selection number ranges permissible material

A Material Number Price

80 A. Optional field B. Required entry field+ C. Suppress D. Display

80 A. Posting date B. Reference C. Invoice date D. Terms of payment

115 Configuring the system end user training Defining the project scope

115 which of the following are solution Manager Usage scenarios? Implement SAP Solution Upgrade SAP solution not all above

115 vendor material Delivery date plant Quantity

80A. Warehouse stock B. On-order stock C. Reorder point

80

GA

When do you service entry sheets are saved, the material document is created and when the service entry sheet are approve, postings are made in financial accounting. It is true or falseWhere are only time-independent conditions defined for the procurement process?

A. In purchasing info records

D. In scheduling agreements

A. In the source list at plant level

B. In the info record at client level

C. In the quota arrangement

D. In the info record at purchasing organization level

Which are the statement about transfer posting material to material

can only be carried out in a single step

can be preplanned via a reservation

can only be made form unrestricted-use stock of plant

is only possible if both materials are managed in the same order unit

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object "plant"?

A. A plant can be assigned directly to one controlling area.

B. A plant can be assigned to several company codes.

C. A plant can be assigned to a reference purchasing organization.

D. A plant can be assigned to exactly one company code.

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object "purchasing organization".?

A. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple company codes

B. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple controlling areas

C. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple plants

D. Multiple purchasing groups can be assigned to a purchasing organization

A. Invoices for invoicing plans can be generated automatically.

B. The start date of an invoicing plan can be defined at item level.

C. Invoicing plans can be used for stock materials as well as for consumable materials.

D. The invoicing plan type for a purchase order item can be changed retroactively.

permissible item categories

Which entries are mandatory in a purcharse order item for consignment ?

Special procurement key Consignment

Item category Consignment

Which field attribute is given the highest priority in the field selection control? Which fields can you include in the check for duplicate invoices in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

Which of the following activites would occur in phase 3? Select the correct answers

testing the system to ensure that it meets the specified business requirements

Developping training materials

Monitor SAP support Desk

Manage Change requests

Which of the following do you enter when you create a blanket purchase orderWhich of the following elements belong to warehouse stock available for MRP in net requirement calculation? (Choose three.)

D. Non-valuated goods receipt blocked stock

E. Fixed purchase requisitions

Which of the following is a prerequisite for transfer postings between two materials ("material to material")?

A. The materials being transferred must have the same valuation class.

B. The materials being transferred must have the same material type.

C. The materials being transferred must have the same material group.

D. The materials being transferred must have the same base unit of measure.

Which of the following statements about SAP Solution Manager is correct?

A. SAP Solution Manager is a standalone system that communicates with the systems in the system landscape.

B. SAP Solution Manager is installed as a component of each of your existing landscapes.

C. SAP Solution Manager is used only for implementing your application.

D. SAP Solution Manager is an add-on industry solution.

Page 167: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Question 1 2 3 4 5

GA

115 Which of the following statements are correct in services

115

115

115 Which operations are periodic invoincing plans suitable for? Rental payments magazine subcriptions electricity bills Credit card settlementsA Purchasing group Purchasing organization User group Plant

115 Which procedures can generate an accounting document

GA A. Delivery schedules B. Contracts C. Invoicing plans

80A. Planned orders C. Schedule lines D. Purchase orders E. Production orders

80 A. General modification B. Credit/Debit D. Posting key

GA

115 Non of the above

115

115 Which statements regarding the release of a purchase requisition

Which of the following statements applies to the Enterprise Portal?

A. The portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different systems.

B. The portal is an interface for managing variants of frequently-used transactions.

C. The portal is only a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data.

D. The portal buffers all data so that work can continue in the portal if one of the assigned systems fails.

When procuring services, you can work with or without a service master record

The account assigment category unknown (U) is allowed only in purchase orders with item category D (Service).

You must specify a limit in a service item.

The service specification of a service item can be structured in a maximum of four hierarchy levels

You cannot specify just one limit in a service item. A service specification with at least one service must exist

Which of the following statements best describes the purpose of the SAP Solution Manager

To provide the tools, content and service to implement, operate, monitor and support the SAP Solution

To provide the tools and content to support the functional and technical implementation of your SAP solutions

To provide the tools to support the implementation and setup of operations of your SAP solutions

To provide the tools and service to support the operations in all available SAP solution

Which of the following statements regarding other goods receipts is correct

Other goods receipts are receipts that cannot reference another document

There goods receipts are always non-valuated

The free of charge delivery does not bleong to this form of goods receipt

An initial stock balance entry is an other goods receipt

You can enter a value manually for some of these goods receipts

Which parameter can you choose for a message type in purchasing

Material to material transfer posting

storage location to storage location from the same plant

Storege location to storage location from plant A to plant B

Which procurement element can be created in Purchasing with automatic purchase order generation?

D. Contract release orders

Which procurement elements can be generated in the material requirements planning run for a material that is procured only externally? (Choose three.)

B. Purchase requisitions

Which rule can be selected in account determination for Inventory postings (Transaction BSX)?

C. Valuation modification

Which settings can be made for account assignment categories? (Choose two.)

A. The field selection for all fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category.

B. The field selection for the account assignment fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category.

C. The field selection for all fields of the purchase order header can be defined based on the account assignment category.

D. New account assignment categories can be created in Customizing.

Which statements about shelf life expiration date check are correct

You must maintain the remainging shelf life in the PO

You must to activate the shelf life expiration date for plant and movement type to use this fuction

If the shelf life expiration date is shorten than the remaining shelf life the system always send a warning message

Which statements about the subcontracting process are correct

You must set the especial stock indicator O in the purchase order

You order material for a customer, which is then delivered directly to de customer by the vendor

The vendor must be entered in the material master record as an eligible manufacturer

The vendor must be entered inthe BOM as an eligible manufacturer

Inthe purchase order, use item category L

The release status describes which follow-on documents can be generated from purchase requisition

The aim of the release strategy is to control transmission of the requisition

You can have just 2 release strategys

The document type of the requisition determines whether the entire requisition is assigned to a release strategy or whether the release strategies are assigned on an item-wise basis

Page 168: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Question 1 2 3 4 5

80 A. Count status B. Adjustment status C. Delete status E. Material status

115 Which the following statements applies to the enterprise portal

115 Planned delivery time Requirement lead time

115

80

GA

B. Any valuation class.

80 A. A material document

115

115

80B. Purchasing C. Accounting D. Basic Data E. Forecasting

GA

A

GA

Which statuses are updated at header level in a physical inventory document? (Choose three.)

D. Physical inventory status

The portal is an interface for managing variants of frecuently used transaction

The portal buffers all data so that work continue in the portal

the portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different system

The portal is a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data

Which times belongs to replenishment lead time in the planning run for the external procurement

Purchasing processing time

Minimum remaining shelf life

Good receipt processing time

Which to the following is a prerequisite for transfer postings between two materials

The materials being transferred must have the same material type

The materials being transferred must have the same base unit of mature

The materials being transferred must have the same valuation class

The materials being transferred must have the same material group

Which two options can you define in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification to manage unplanned delivery costs for invoice receipts? (Choose two.)

A. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a price difference account.

B. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a separate G/L account for unplanned delivery costs.

C. The unplanned delivery costs are to be split across the invoice items.

D. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a specific cost center. Answer: B,C

Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials?

A. All valuation classes from the account category reference assigned to the material type.

C. All valuation classes of the valuation grouping code of the used valuation area.

D. The default valuation class from the user parameters.

With reference to which of the following objects can you enter an invoice in Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

B. A service entry sheet

C. A vendor delivery note

D. A different invoice from the vendor

Write what are the information that you need to allocate in the invoice verification to post invoices without reference to Purchase Order

basic data: posting date, document date, amount, currency, tax code payment:base line date, payment term

basic data: posting date, document date, amount, reference, tax code payment: base line date, paymente term, payment method

This function is not possible

You can set the rejection indicator in the quotation item. Can you still create a Purchase Order with reference to this quotation item?

Yes, but you have to enter the price manually since it is not copied from the quotation

No, you have to maintain a new quotation first

Yes, you can create the purchase order regardless of the rejection indicator

No, a quotation item for which the rejection indicator is set can not be converted into a purchase order

You can use profiles to help you enter data in material master records. For which user departments are profiles available? (Choose two.)

A. Material Requirements Planning

You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that are open for delivery from the relevant vendor. What happens when the price is changed in the info record?

A. The moving average price of the material is recalculated.

B. The new price is immediately proposed for all new purchase orders created for the relevant material with the respective vendor.

C. The PO price in the purchase orders that are still open is automatically changed to the new price.

D. Invoice verification automatically receives a message about the price change made.

You create a purcharse requisition for 10 pallets of copier paper belonging to material gruop 4711. This material has no material master record. Which of the following souce of supply can be proposed by the system ?

A quantity contract item for 500 pallets of copier paper for a stock material that belongs to material group 4711

A value contract item with category W (material group) for articles of material group 4711.

an info record for material without a material master record for copier paper of material group 4711 with tons as unit of measurements.

A central contract item with category item M (material unknown) for 100 tons of copier paper of material group 4711.

You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?

A. In the language in which you are logged on to the system

B. In the language defined in the vendor master record

C. In the language of the purchase order header

D. In the language defined in the output determination Customizing settings

Page 169: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Question 1 2 3 4 5

A Plant Purchase organization Material group Document Type.

GA

A

115 50% 67.50% 100% 75%

80A. Procurement type B. Exception message C. MRP type D. MRP controller

A

115

GA

C. Stock account

80

80

A

you create a purchase requisition. What control the field selection.You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are selected while others are not. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system? (Choose two.)

A. Purchase order item of the category "Limit".

B. Valuated goods receipt for a purchase order item with a purchase order quantity of 100 pieces. Previous goods movements: Goods receipt of 80 pieces and return delivery to the vendor of 75 pieces.

C. Purchase order item for which a goods receipt was posted to non-valuated GR blocked stock.

D. Purchase order item with account assignment, for which a goods receipt is not planned.

You have a open purcharse order for a valuated material. What changes can you make to the master data here ?

fixed vendor in the source list from vendor A to vendor B.

Material gruop in the material master from material gruop 1 to material gruop 2

base unit of measure in the material master from EA( (each) to KG (kilogram)

Material typo from ROH (raw material) to FERT (finisshed product)

You have set up the stochastic check in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification as follows: At a threshold value of 10,000 euros, there is a 50% likelihood of an invoice being blocked. What is the likelihood of an invoice with a value of 15,000 Euros being blockedYou perform a total planning run for a plant. On the initial screen, you can select a creation indicator for MRP lists. Which of the following can determine whether an MRP list is created for a material? You post a good receipt for a purcharse order item. The material has Material Type NLAG ( non-stock material) what are the effect ??

The value is posted a consuption account

The quantity is posted in consuption.

The value is posted to a price different account

The quantity is posted to a special stock for non-stock material.

You post a goods receipt to the non-valuated GR blocked stock movement type 103. What are the effects of this?

The quantity booked into GR Blocked stock is not yet available for MRP

The open PO quantity is reduce by the GR blocked stock

In the case of valuated materials, an accounting document is generated

The quantity booked into GR blocked stocks is recorded in the PO history

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purchase order. The material has a material master record and a material type for which quantity and value are updated. The purchase order item has the account assignment category K (= cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L accounts were the postings made? (Choose two.)

A. GR/IR clearing account

B. Consumption account

D. Price difference account

You post an invoice with unplanned delivery costs. These costs should be posted in full to the stock account of a material. What prerequisites must be met to achieve this? (Choose two.)

A. The material affected must be valuated based on the standard price.

B. The material affected must be valuated based on the moving average price.

C. Stock of the affected material must be available at least in the invoiced quantity.

D. In the invoice header, you have to enter the stock account to which the unplanned delivery costs are to be posted.

You procure a material using the "Consignment" process. You want to ensure that purchase requisitions with the "Consignment" item category are generated automatically for requirements in requirements planning. Which of the following settings allows you to do this? (Choose two.)

A. Enter "Consignment" as the special procurement type in the material master record.

B. Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and enter it as a fixed source of supply in the source list.

C. Activate the quota arrangement for the relevant material and create a quota arrangement item using "Consignment" as the special procurement type.

D. Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and select the "Regular Vendor" indicator in the record.

You receipt a confirmation from, vendor. What do you have to do before you can enter the confirmed delivery date and quantity in a purcharse order item.

Set the good receipt indicator.

Choose a delivery date at least one month in the future.

Use a confirmation control key in the revelant purcharse order item.

Set the aknowlegement required indicator in the vendor master of relevant vendor.

Page 170: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Question 1 2 3 4 5

80

A

80A. Breakdown B. Layout

80

A

GAB. Price determination D. Partner determination

80A. Scope of list B. Selection parameter C. Layout D. Breakdown

GAA. Purchasing B. Accounting D. Basic Data

80

115

80

You receive an invoice from a vendor for a material to the amount of EUR 1,000 for 100 pieces. After you have entered the header data and the purchase order number, the system proposes a quantity of 70 pieces and an amount of EUR 700 from the goods receipt postings. How can you enter the invoice in the system without it being blocked for payment? (Choose two.)

A. Switch to document parking and then save the invoice.

B. Define a tolerance group in the vendor master record of the relevant vendor before posting, so that the invoice is then reduced automatically when posted.

C. Use the manual invoice reduction, select the "Vendor Error: Reduce Invoice" option, and enter the quantity and value invoiced by the vendor next to the quantity and value proposed.

D. Before posting the invoice, you change the payment block indicator in the invoice header to "Released for Payment".

You send material a subcontractor by posting a good issue from the stock Monitoring List for Subcontractor. Where will you find the posted quantity afterwards in inventory Managements ?

In a special stock, at storage location level from which the good issue was posted.

In a separate storage location

in a special stock, at the plant level from which the good issue was posted.

In the consuption values of the material master as consumed quantity

You set up the document overview in the Enjoy SAP purchase order (transaction ME21N). What setting allows you to sort documents by vendor first and then by document number within a vendor?

C. Personal settings for the transaction

D. Default values in Customizing

You transfer material between two plants. During the transport process, some parts are damaged so badly that they have to be scrapped. How you can you post this as scrapping? (Choose two.)

A. You reverse the stock removal in the issuing plant and post the scrapping there.

B. You put away the entire quantity in the receiving plant and post the scrapping there.

C. You adjust the stock in transit and put away the remaining quantity in the receiving plant.

D. You put away the entire quantity in the receiving plant, where you immediately carry out a physical inventory of the material.

you want automatically the system deleted old reservation for which no movement were posted . What is the prerequisiter for this.

A retention period for reservation item must be defied

Good movements for the reservation must be allowed

The reservation must be an automatic reservation.

An available check for the reservation must have been carried out successfully.

You want to convert purchase requisitions into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

A. Source determination

C. Message determination

You want to create a list of all purchase orders for which you have not yet received an invoice. What can you use to find these specific purchase orders when entering your criteria for the search query? You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum? (Choose two.)

C. General Plant Data/Storage

You want to post a goods issue from stock in quality inspection. In which of the following cases is this possible? (Choose two.)

A. Withdrawal for scrapping

B. Withdrawal for inspection sample

C. Withdrawal for a reservation

D. Withdrawal for a cost center

You would like to convert assigned purchase requisitions into follow-on documents. Which of the following statements apply?

You can convert several requisition items from the same vendor to a purchase order. In this case, one requisition item is generated for each PO item

You can convert several requisition items from the same vendor to a purchase order. In doing so, requistion items with the same material are automatically combined for one PO item

If the assigned source was blocked after the assigment was made in the source list, it is not possible to convert the relevant requisition item

You can convert SA delivery schedule lines and contract release orders together

Your company manages stock of various advertising articles on a quantity and value basis. In the future, you want to analyze the value of these advertising articles. Unfortunately, the articles have been created with different material types, material groups, valuation classes, and in different number range intervals. For this reason, you want to change the assignments. Which of the following changes are possible, even if stock exists for the articles?

A. You create a new material group and then change the material group of the advertising articles to the new material group.

B. You create a new material type and then change the material type of the advertising articles to the new material type.

C. You create a new valuation class and then change the valuation class of the advertising articles to the new valuation class.

D. You create a new number range interval and then change the material numbers of the advertising articles to a number in the new number range interval.

Page 171: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Question 1 2 3 4 5

A Purcharse value key material type Plans parameter.Yours vendors don´t always send the exact quantities. You therefore allow tolerances for underdeliveries and overdeliveries. Where can you define defauls for this tolerances.

user-spefic setting in the good movements transaction MIGO

Page 172: Material de Referencia MM
Page 173: Material de Referencia MM

Defining the project scope

Page 174: Material de Referencia MM
Page 175: Material de Referencia MM
Page 176: Material de Referencia MM
Page 177: Material de Referencia MM
Page 178: Material de Referencia MM
Page 179: Material de Referencia MM

AnswerTest Number Filtred Confused Question 1 2 3

115 37 Yes No

115 3 Yes No TRUE FALSE

material A has been ordered at 4 uni/pc, 20 units of material B has been ordered at 45 UNI/pc. The vendor has supplied all the materials. The invoice for the supply has been received and posted. He now sends an invoice that includes 825 eur as freight charges and 125 eur as custom duty that was not planned. The system has been configured to distribute delivery costs amongst

Stock account for material A 380 + Stock account for Material B 570 +

Stock account for Material A 500 +, Stock Account for Material B 450 +

Freight clearing 875 +

A purchasing organization must always be assigned to a company code

Page 180: Material de Referencia MM

115 90 Yes No 40 30 20

115 61 Yes No 1045 1026 1050

A release stategy for a purchase reqisition is defined as follows: Account aassigment category (blank), Plant (1000 or 1100) purchasing group (001), Material (m-01), Valutaion price (>200), quantity (>50). For next lines: For which purchase requisition item will this stategy be determinated?

A vendor offer you a mateial at the gross price of 1000 EUR in addition the vendor give you 10% discount and 5% cash discount and absolute freight amount 200. What is the EFECTIVE PRICE.

Page 181: Material de Referencia MM

115 111 Yes No Verdadero FALSE

80 4 Yes No

A. Plant

115 48 Yes No Plant Partner Role

A 120 Yes No Client Plant

GA 19 Yes No

Account determination always takes place on a plant dependent basis

At what level can you set quantity and value updating on a material type?

B. Company code

C. Valuation area

At what level in the vendor master record is it possible to define purchasing data that is different from that which is maintained at client level

partner schema

At which organization level do you maintain source list ?

Company code

Automatic purchase order generation for goods receipt .How can blocked purchase requisitions be released? (Choose two.)

A. Manually, using individual release

B. Manually, using the "Change Purchase Requisition" transaction

C. Manually, using collective release

Page 182: Material de Referencia MM

80 7 Yes Yes

115 81 Yes No

115 23 Yes No YES NO

Before deliveries arrive from certain vendors, you want to be informed of the delivery date and quantity. To do this, you use a confirmation control key. Which of the following settings can you define in a confirmation control key?

A. Only the confirmed quantity can be posted when the goods are received.

B. Confirmations must be transmitted electronically.

C. The goods receipt can be posted no earlier than the confirmed delivery date.

Besides manual creation, how can you create source list entries?

Using the mass maintenance tool

When creating info records

When creating a purchase order

Can you change reservation created automatically

Page 183: Material de Referencia MM

A 125 Yes No

115 110 Yes No Yes No

80 41 Yes No

Deliveries Often arrive too late. You therefore want to send remainders to your vendor. Which prerequisites must be fulfilled to generates remainders for purchase order item ?

The purcharse order item has no account assigment category.

The delivery date is at least one week in the past

You have entered at least one remainder level in the purcharse order item.

Does the movement type with which a goods receipt is recorded have any influence on the G/L accounts of the GR posting

During a physical inventory, the warehouse manager has decided to have the quantity of a material recounted for a physical inventory document. How is a recount processed in the system?

A. The new count quantity is entered in the existing physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted.

B. A new physical inventory document is created. The new count quantity is entered. When the inventory difference is now posted, all physical inventory documents still to be posted for the material affected are deleted.

C. A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. After the recount, the inventory difference for the old document is posted first, followed by the inventory difference for the new document.

Page 184: Material de Referencia MM

115 76 Yes No cost center limit asset

115 56 Yes No

115 42 Yes No

115 15 Yes No

80 19 Yes No

GA 18 Yes No

Flag which ones are item categories

For posting inventory differences, you can define tolerance group. What tolerance can you define?

Maximum difference amount for each physical inventory document

Maximum difference amount for each physical inventory document item

Maximum quantity variance for each physical inventory document item

For the evaluated receipt settlement, the following prerequisite must be fulfilled (Automatic Invoice verification)

The purchase order must be created automatically

The ERS delivery indicator must be set in the vendor master record

The ERS indicator must be set in the purchase order

For which functions can you use transaction Migo

Creating reservations

Changing the material document

Deleting a material document

For which of the following objects can you post a goods issue directly from the valuated stock using a standard movement type? (Choose three.)

A. Cost center

B. Profit center

C. Production order

For which of the following transactions can the source of supply be determined automatically? (Choose two.)

A. Create reservation

B. Create purchase order, vendor known

C. Create purchase order, vendor unknown

Page 185: Material de Referencia MM

80 35 Yes No

A. Client C. Plant

80 16 Yes No

115 26 Yes No

80 68 Yes No

115 70 Yes No PO Requisition Quotation

For which organizational levels can you maintain the material status in material master records? (Choose two.)

B. Company code

For which transfer postings can an accounting document be generated if the postings are made with a valuated material? (Choose two.)

A. Transfer postings from GR blocked stock to unrestricted-use stock

B. Transfer postings between plants that have the same company code

C. Transfer postings from unrestricted-use stock to quality inspection stock

From which stock type can goods issues to cost center be posted

Unrestricted-use stock

Quality inspection stock

Valuated blocked stock

How can blocked purchase requisitions be released? (Choose two.)

A. Manually, using individual release

B. Manually, using the "Change Purchase Requisition" transaction

C. Manually, using collective release

How can you give maintenance to a purchasing info record.

Page 186: Material de Referencia MM

A 126

Yes No

80 30 Yes No

A. 100% B. 75% C. 67.5%

In a vendor master record , you enter a different vendor as a partner with partner role (partner funtion) Invoicing party. What is the funtion of this partner role in Materials Management ?

This partner is proposed when you enter an invoice with reference to purchase order.

All unplanned delivery costs with reference to purchase order are billed to this partner.

This partner automatically received copies for all message relating to purcharse document.

In Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification, the following values are defined for the stochastic block: Threshold value. 10000 Percentage. 50 You enter an invoice with a value of 15000. What is the probability that the invoice will be blocked stochastically?

Page 187: Material de Referencia MM

80 32 Yes No

80 79 Yes No

A. Two B. Three C. One

In Logistics Invoice Verification, from where does the system determine the terms of payment for invoices without a purchase order reference?

A. From the last invoice for the vendor.

B. From the purchasing data in the vendor master record.

C. From the accounting data in the vendor master record.

In the future, your employees are to use a catalog to create purchase requisitions for consumable materials. To do this, they are to access catalogs directly from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N. How many catalogs can be accessed from the purchase requisition transaction ME51N?

Page 188: Material de Referencia MM

GA 8 Yes Yes

115 39 Yes No

80 29 Yes Yes

In the goods receipt transaction MIGO, you have opened the "My documents" overview. Which documents are displayed under "Purchase Orders"?

A. The purchase orders that you recently created

B. The purchase orders found by the system in the last document search

C. The purchase orders for which you last posted goods receipts

In which cases you have to enter a subsequent debit in a logitics invoice verification

You received and invoice from a forwarding agent or unplanned delivery cost related to a delivery that it is not invoiced

You receive and invoice form a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery cost related to a Purchase Order, which has been invoiced

The vendor invoices a quantity higher than delivered for a purchase order in which good receipt is already done

In which of the following cases can invoices be released automatically? (Choose two.)

A. The invoice was blocked stochastically.

B. The invoice was blocked due to a price variance, and the buyer has now changed the price in the purchase order to the invoice price.

C. The invoice was blocked manually because the invoice price was lower than the order price, and the buyer has now changed the price in the purchase order to the invoice price.

Page 189: Material de Referencia MM

80 27 Yes No

80 26 Yes No

80 13 Yes No

A 123 Yes No Client

In which of the following cases do you have to enter a subsequent debit in Logistics Invoice Verification?

A. The vendor invoices a quantity higher than delivered for a purchase order item in which goods-receipt-based invoice verification is flagged.

B. You receive an invoice in foreign currency and the current exchange rate is higher than the rate specified in the purchase order.

C. You receive an invoice from a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery costs related to a purchase order item already invoiced.

In which of the following cases do you have to maintain GR/IR clearing accounts in Logistics Invoice Verification?

A. The vendor has invoiced a price higher than the purchase order price.

B. You have posted an invoice incorrectly and canceled it afterwards.

C. For an item that has been delivered, a higher quantity was invoiced than delivered.

In which of the following cases is the goods receipt always posted as non-valuated?

A. Goods receipt for initial stock entry

B. Goods receipt to the stock of material provided to vendor

C. Goods receipt for a free-of-charge delivery

Info records can have texts for differents organizational levels. For which levels can you maintain these texts ??

Company code

Purchasing Organization in cobination with a Plant

Page 190: Material de Referencia MM

115 112 Yes No Valuation cla Account grouItem category

A 133 Yes No

GA 25 Yes No

Mention what are the principal and direct factor to determine the automatic account determination

Ocasionally a vendor delivers a goods witout a purchase order. You want the system to create a purcharse order for such deliveries automatically when a good receipt is posted. What are the prerequisites for this scenario ?

Automatic purchase order creation must be allowed for the movement type wich you post the good receipt

Automatic purchase order creation must be allowed for the plant and storege location to which you post the good receipt.

A reference purcharse organization must be assigned to the plant to which you post the good receipt

SAP Solution Manager contains the Service Desk function. What functions does the Service Desk provide? (Choose two.)

A. Process for message processing

B. Management of SAP Notes

C. SAP Help

Page 191: Material de Referencia MM

115 57 Yes Yes

115 94 Yes No

A 136 Yes No

115 85 Yes No TRUE FALSE

115 4 Yes No TRUE FALSE

Select 4 things what the material type control

Number Range

Procurement type (internal, external)

User department (views)

Solution Monitoring consists of the which tree components

SAP service marketplace

Business process Monitoring

Service level reporting

The book quantity of a material is 100. the inventory count result is 0. How do you handle this count in a physical inventory document

You enter 0 in quantity field

You post a good issue with quantity 100.

You deleted the item from the physical inventory document.

The source determination in a purchase requistion finds a source of supply is the next sequence: 1 Quota Arrangement; 2 Source List, 3 Outline Agreement, 4 Info Record. This is true or false

The storage location key 0001 may be used multiple times

Page 192: Material de Referencia MM

115 113 Yes No Verdadero FALSE

115 114 Yes No Verdadero FALSE

GA 7 Yes No

GA 21 Yes No

To be able to use production planning (component PP) material valuation must be set up at company code level

Value strings can be changed and extended en each company according to particular requirements

What advantage does the collective number have in requests for quotations?

A. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for message output of requests for quotations.

B. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating info records from quotations.

C. The collective number makes it easier to select quotation documents for the price comparison.

What are characteristics of material valuation at the moving average price? (Choose two.)

A. Price difference postings can happen when posting an invoice receipt

B. Goods receipts are always valuated based on the moving average price from the material master record

C. The moving average price is equal to the total value multiplied by total quantity of stock

Page 193: Material de Referencia MM

115 96 Yes No

80 38 Yes No

80 20 Yes No

80 18 Yes Yes

80 14 Yes Yes

What are the five phases of the implementation roadmap?

Project preparation, configuration blue print, realization, final publish, go live and support

Project prepartion, busines blueprint, realization, final preparation, go live and support

Project kick off, configuration blueprint, realizatión, final preparation, support

What can an MRP area include? (Choose three.)

A. One plant

B. Multiple plants

C. Multiple storage locations of a plant

What can be changed in a material document after it has been posted?

A. The vendor delivery note number in the document header

B. The quantity at item level

C. The stock type at item level

What can be triggered by a goods receipt posting? (Choose three.)

A. The buyer receives a message about the goods received.

B. The requisitioner of a referenced purchase requisition receives a message about the goods received.

C. For stock material, the total quantity and total value are recalculated in the material master record.

What can you define for a movement type in Customizing? (Choose two.)

A. The transactions in which a movement type can be used

B. The reversal movement types for a movement type

C. The quantity and value updates for postings with a movement type

Page 194: Material de Referencia MM

GA 10 Yes Yes

A 131 Yes No Incoterms

A 121 Yes No

80 48 Yes Yes

GA 4 Yes Yes

What can you derive from the purchase order structure in the invoice verification transaction MIRO (Enter Invoice)? (Choose two.)

A. Whether blocked invoices exist for a purchase order item

B. Whether the goods receipt for a purchase order item was posted as valuated or non-valuated

C. The total of open items for a vendor in the current invoice

What can you maintain in vendor master record as well as info record.

Mininum order quantity

Terms of payments.

What can you specify when you assign a message schema to an application in Purchasing ?

the number of outputs for prints message

the access secuence for the message types in this application

the allowed mediums for outputs, for example print output or fax.

What can you use to determine the origin of a purchase requisition?

A. Requester

B. Creation indicator

C. MRP controller

What characterizes an item category in purchasing? (Choose two.)

A. New item categories can be created in Customizing.

B. The item category contains a default value for the invoice receipt indicator in a purchase order item.

C. Any item category can be used in combination with any account assignment category in a purchase order.

Page 195: Material de Referencia MM

115 80 Yes No

80 43 Yes Yes

80 1 Yes No

80 23 Yes No

GA 29 Yes No

What control the creation profile in the scheduling agreement

Delivery Date

Aggregation horizon

Activate the schedule agreement

What data is displayed in the list of inventory differences? (Choose three.)

A. Book quantity

B. Quantity counted

C. Difference quantity

What does an account group determine when vendor master records are created? (Choose three.)

A. The number range in which a vendor master record must be created for this account group

B. The default setting of the info update indicator in purchase orders for vendors in this account group

C. The field selection when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

What does the document type control when an invoice is entered? (Choose two.)

A. The number assignment (number range interval) for the invoice document

B. The number assignment (number range interval) for the accounting document

C. Whether the invoice is posted as gross or net

What features do subcontracting orders (item category L) have? (Choose two.)

A. The goods receipt for a subcontracting order must always be posted as valuated.

B. At least one component must be provided to the subcontractor.

C. Subcontracting orders may not have an account assignment.

Page 196: Material de Referencia MM

80 31 Yes No

GA 15 Yes No

GA 26 Yes No

80 10 Yes No

GA 28 Yes No

What happens when you cancel invoices in Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

A. The system generates a subsequent debit.

B. The system generates a credit memo.

C. G/L accounts will be newly determined.

What information can you specify in a quota arrangement? (Choose two.)

A. Plant from which material is procured for stock transfer requirements

B. Outline agreement number for external procurement requirements

C. Vendor for external procurement requirements

What is "SAP ERP"?

A. SAP ERP is an application that a company can use to manage its business processes efficiently.

B. SAP ERP is a system that contains components for purchasing, sales, materials management, production, and so on.

C. SAP ERP is a planning system in which enhanced planning processes can be represented.

What is mandatory in a purchase order for a non-valuated material?

A. Set the indicator for goods receipt.

B. Select an account assignment category and assign an account assignment object.

C. Set the indicator for non-valuated goods receipts.

What special feature does a blanket purchase order (item category B) have in comparison to a standard purchase order (standard item category)?

A. Blanket purchase orders allow non-valuated goods receipts only.

B. Blanket purchase order items require an account assignment to be entered.

C. Blanket purchase orders items can have multiple account assignment.

Page 197: Material de Referencia MM

80 45 Yes No

115 24 Yes No

115 65 Yes No YES NO

GA 6 Yes No

GA 13 Yes No

What special features apply to purchase orders of services (item category D)? (Choose two.)

A. Unknown account assignment is allowed.

B. The price can be determined from the service conditions.

C. All service lines must have the same account assignment.

What statements are true about dynamic availability check

You can not configure the message (warning or error)

You must asign the checking rule and the checking goup in the material master record

You can never withdrawal item from storage if the availability check is not enough

When do you service entry sheets are saved, the material document is created and when the service entry sheet are approve, postings are made in financial accounting. It is true or false

Where are only time-independent conditions defined for the procurement process?

A. In purchasing info records

B. In contracts

C. In purchase orders

Where can you maintain the regular vendor?

A. In the source list at plant level

B. In the info record at client level

C. In the quota arrangement

Page 198: Material de Referencia MM

115 20 Yes No

80 36 Yes No

80 2 Yes No

GA 31 Yes No

115 74 Yes No fiel selection

A 135 Yes No Price

Which are the statement about transfer posting material to material

can only be carried out in a single step

can be preplanned via a reservation

can only be made form unrestricted-use stock of plant

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object "plant"?

A. A plant can be assigned directly to one controlling area.

B. A plant can be assigned to several company codes.

C. A plant can be assigned to a reference purchasing organization.

Which assignment can be made for the organizational object "purchasing organization".?

A. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple company codes

B. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple controlling areas

C. A purchasing organization can be assigned to multiple plants

Which attributes do invoicing plans have? (Choose two.)

A. Invoices for invoicing plans can be generated automatically.

B. The start date of an invoicing plan can be defined at item level.

C. Invoicing plans can be used for stock materials as well as for consumable materials.

Which control the document type

account determination

number ranges

Which entries are mandatory in a purcharse order item for consignment ?

Material Number

Special procurement key Consignment

Page 199: Material de Referencia MM

80 3 Yes No

80 25 Yes No

115 95 Yes No

115 92 Yes No

115 100 Yes No vendor material

Which field attribute is given the highest priority in the field selection control?

A. Optional field

B. Required entry field+

C. Suppress

Which fields can you include in the check for duplicate invoices in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

A. Posting date

B. Reference

C. Invoice date

Which of the following activites would occur in phase 3? Select the correct answers

Configuring the system

testing the system to ensure that it meets the specified business requirements

Developping training materials

which of the following are solution Manager Usage scenarios?

Monitor SAP support Desk

Implement SAP Solution

Upgrade SAP solution

Which of the following do you enter when you create a blanket purchase order

Delivery date

Page 200: Material de Referencia MM

80 11 Yes Yes

80 15 Yes No

GA 24 Yes Yes

GA 27 Yes No

Which of the following elements belong to warehouse stock available for MRP in net requirement calculation? (Choose three.)

A. Warehouse stock

B. On-order stock

C. Reorder point

Which of the following is a prerequisite for transfer postings between two materials ("material to material")?

A. The materials being transferred must have the same valuation class.

B. The materials being transferred must have the same material type.

C. The materials being transferred must have the same material group.

Which of the following statements about SAP Solution Manager is correct?

A. SAP Solution Manager is a standalone system that communicates with the systems in the system landscape.

B. SAP Solution Manager is installed as a component of each of your existing landscapes.

C. SAP Solution Manager is used only for implementing your application.

Which of the following statements applies to the Enterprise Portal?

A. The portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different systems.

B. The portal is an interface for managing variants of frequently-used transactions.

C. The portal is only a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data.

Page 201: Material de Referencia MM

115 66 Yes No

115 93 Yes No

115 17 Yes No

115 105 Yes No

A 118 Yes No Purchasing g User group

115 19 Yes No

Which of the following statements are correct in services

When procuring services, you can work with or without a service master record

The account assigment category unknown (U) is allowed only in purchase orders with item category D (Service).

You must specify a limit in a service item.

Which of the following statements best describes the purpose of the SAP Solution Manager

To provide the tools, content and service to implement, operate, monitor and support the SAP Solution

To provide the tools and content to support the functional and technical implementation of your SAP solutions

To provide the tools to support the implementation and setup of operations of your SAP solutions

Which of the following statements regarding other goods receipts is correct

Other goods receipts are receipts that cannot reference another document

There goods receipts are always non-valuated

The free of charge delivery does not bleong to this form of goods receipt

Which operations are periodic invoincing plans suitable for?

Rental payments

magazine subcriptions

electricity bills

Which parameter can you choose for a message type in purchasing

Purchasing organization

Which procedures can generate an accounting document

Material to material transfer posting

storage location to storage location from the same plant

Storege location to storage location from plant A to plant B

Page 202: Material de Referencia MM

GA 3 Yes No

80 37 Yes No

80 72 Yes No

GA 5 Yes No

Which procurement element can be created in Purchasing with automatic purchase order generation?

A. Delivery schedules

B. Contracts C. Invoicing plans

Which procurement elements can be generated in the material requirements planning run for a material that is procured only externally? (Choose three.)

A. Planned orders

B. Purchase requisitions

C. Schedule lines

Which rule can be selected in account determination for Inventory postings (Transaction BSX)?

A. General modification

B. Credit/Debit

C. Valuation modification

Which settings can be made for account assignment categories? (Choose two.)

A. The field selection for all fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category.

B. The field selection for the account assignment fields of a purchase order item can be defined based on the account assignment category.

C. The field selection for all fields of the purchase order header can be defined based on the account assignment category.

Page 203: Material de Referencia MM

115 18 Yes No

115 103 Yes No

115 88 Yes No

80 42 Yes No

Which statements about shelf life expiration date check are correct

You must maintain the remainging shelf life in the PO

You must to activate the shelf life expiration date for plant and movement type to use this fuction

If the shelf life expiration date is shorten than the remaining shelf life the system always send a warning message

Which statements about the subcontracting process are correct

You must set the especial stock indicator O in the purchase order

You order material for a customer, which is then delivered directly to de customer by the vendor

The vendor must be entered in the material master record as an eligible manufacturer

Which statements regarding the release of a purchase requisition

The release status describes which follow-on documents can be generated from purchase requisition

The aim of the release strategy is to control transmission of the requisition

You can have just 2 release strategys

Which statuses are updated at header level in a physical inventory document? (Choose three.)

A. Count status

B. Adjustment status

C. Delete status

Page 204: Material de Referencia MM

115 97 Yes No

115 49 Yes No

115 22 Yes No

80 24 Yes No

GA 22 Yes No

Which the following statements applies to the enterprise portal

The portal is an interface for managing variants of frecuently used transaction

The portal buffers all data so that work continue in the portal

the portal is a uniform framework for accessing company data from different system

Which times belongs to replenishment lead time in the planning run for the external procurement

Purchasing processing time

Minimum remaining shelf life

Good receipt processing time

Which to the following is a prerequisite for transfer postings between two materials

The materials being transferred must have the same material type

The materials being transferred must have the same base unit of mature

The materials being transferred must have the same valuation class

Which two options can you define in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification to manage unplanned delivery costs for invoice receipts? (Choose two.)

A. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a price difference account.

B. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a separate G/L account for unplanned delivery costs.

C. The unplanned delivery costs are to be split across the invoice items.

Which valuation classes can be selected when creating the accounting view for valuated materials?

A. All valuation classes from the account category reference assigned to the material type.

B. Any valuation class.

C. All valuation classes of the valuation grouping code of the used valuation area.

Page 205: Material de Referencia MM

80 28 Yes No

115 38 Yes No

115 59 Yes No

80 33 Yes No

With reference to which of the following objects can you enter an invoice in Logistics Invoice Verification? (Choose two.)

A. A material document

B. A service entry sheet

C. A vendor delivery note

Write what are the information that you need to allocate in the invoice verification to post invoices without reference to Purchase Order

basic data: posting date, document date, amount, currency, tax code payment:base line date, payment term

basic data: posting date, document date, amount, reference, tax code payment: base line date, paymente term, payment method

This function is not possible

You can set the rejection indicator in the quotation item. Can you still create a Purchase Order with reference to this quotation item?

Yes, but you have to enter the price manually since it is not copied from the quotation

No, you have to maintain a new quotation first

Yes, you can create the purchase order regardless of the rejection indicator

You can use profiles to help you enter data in material master records. For which user departments are profiles available? (Choose two.)

A. Material Requirements Planning

B. Purchasing

C. Accounting

Page 206: Material de Referencia MM

GA 17 Yes No

A 134 Yes No

You change the price for the current validity period in an info record. There are still two purchase orders for this material that are open for delivery from the relevant vendor. What happens when the price is changed in the info record?

A. The moving average price of the material is recalculated.

B. The new price is immediately proposed for all new purchase orders created for the relevant material with the respective vendor.

C. The PO price in the purchase orders that are still open is automatically changed to the new price.

You create a purcharse requisition for 10 pallets of copier paper belonging to material gruop 4711. This material has no material master record. Which of the following souce of supply can be proposed by the system ?

A quantity contract item for 500 pallets of copier paper for a stock material that belongs to material group 4711

A value contract item with category W (material group) for articles of material group 4711.

an info record for material without a material master record for copier paper of material group 4711 with tons as unit of measurements.

Page 207: Material de Referencia MM

GA 2 Yes Yes

A 138 Yes No Plant

GA 9 Yes Yes

You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this purchase order printed?

A. In the language in which you are logged on to the system

B. In the language defined in the vendor master record

C. In the language of the purchase order header

you create a purchase requisition. What control the field selection.

Purchase organization

Material group

You enter an invoice for a purchase order with multiple items. You discover that some items are selected while others are not. Which of the following purchase order items are selected by the system? (Choose two.)

A. Purchase order item of the category "Limit".

B. Valuated goods receipt for a purchase order item with a purchase order quantity of 100 pieces. Previous goods movements: Goods receipt of 80 pieces and return delivery to the vendor of 75 pieces.

C. Purchase order item for which a goods receipt was posted to non-valuated GR blocked stock.

Page 208: Material de Referencia MM

A 117 Yes No

115 35 Yes No 50% 67.50% 100%

You have a open purcharse order for a valuated material. What changes can you make to the master data here ?

fixed vendor in the source list from vendor A to vendor B.

Material gruop in the material master from material gruop 1 to material gruop 2

base unit of measure in the material master from EA( (each) to KG (kilogram)

You have set up the stochastic check in Customizing for Logistics Invoice Verification as follows: At a threshold value of 10,000 euros, there is a 50% likelihood of an invoice being blocked. What is the likelihood of an invoice with a value of 15,000 Euros being blocked

Page 209: Material de Referencia MM

80 40 Yes No

A 127 Yes No

115 16 Yes No

You perform a total planning run for a plant. On the initial screen, you can select a creation indicator for MRP lists. Which of the following can determine whether an MRP list is created for a material?

A. Procurement type

B. Exception message

C. MRP type

You post a good receipt for a purcharse order item. The material has Material Type NLAG ( non-stock material) what are the effect ??

The value is posted a consuption account

The quantity is posted in consuption.

The value is posted to a price different account

You post a goods receipt to the non-valuated GR blocked stock movement type 103. What are the effects of this?

The quantity booked into GR Blocked stock is not yet available for MRP

The open PO quantity is reduce by the GR blocked stock

In the case of valuated materials, an accounting document is generated

Page 210: Material de Referencia MM

GA 20 Yes No

80 21 Yes No

You post a valuated goods receipt for a purchase order. The material has a material master record and a material type for which quantity and value are updated. The purchase order item has the account assignment category K (= cost center). After the posting, you check the accounting document. To which G/L accounts were the postings made? (Choose

A. GR/IR clearing account

B. Consumption account

C. Stock account

You post an invoice with unplanned delivery costs. These costs should be posted in full to the stock account of a material. What prerequisites must be met to achieve this? (Choose two.)

A. The material affected must be valuated based on the standard price.

B. The material affected must be valuated based on the moving average price.

C. Stock of the affected material must be available at least in the invoiced quantity.

Page 211: Material de Referencia MM

80 5 Yes Yes

A 130 Yes No

You procure a material using the "Consignment" process. You want to ensure that purchase requisitions with the "Consignment" item category are generated automatically for requirements in requirements planning. Which of the following settings allows you to do this? (Choose two.)

A. Enter "Consignment" as the special procurement type in the material master record.

B. Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and enter it as a fixed source of supply in the source list.

C. Activate the quota arrangement for the relevant material and create a quota arrangement item using "Consignment" as the special procurement type.

You receipt a confirmation from, vendor. What do you have to do before you can enter the confirmed delivery date and quantity in a purcharse order item.

Set the good receipt indicator.

Choose a delivery date at least one month in the future.

Use a confirmation control key in the revelant purcharse order item.

Page 212: Material de Referencia MM

80 22 Yes No

You receive an invoice from a vendor for a material to the amount of EUR 1,000 for 100 pieces. After you have entered the header data and the purchase order number, the system proposes a quantity of 70 pieces and an amount of EUR 700 from the goods receipt postings. How can you enter the invoice in the system without it being blocked for payment?

A. Switch to document parking and then save the invoice.

B. Define a tolerance group in the vendor master record of the relevant vendor before posting, so that the invoice is then reduced automatically when posted.

C. Use the manual invoice reduction, select the "Vendor Error: Reduce Invoice" option, and enter the quantity and value invoiced by the vendor next to the quantity and value proposed.

Page 213: Material de Referencia MM

A 122 Yes No

80 49 Yes No

B. Layout

You send material a subcontractor by posting a good issue from the stock Monitoring List for Subcontractor. Where will you find the posted quantity afterwards in inventory Managements ?

In a special stock, at storage location level from which the good issue was posted.

In a separate storage location

in a special stock, at the plant level from which the good issue was posted.

You set up the document overview in the Enjoy SAP purchase order (transaction ME21N). What setting allows you to sort documents by vendor first and then by document number within a vendor?

A. Breakdown

C. Personal settings for the transaction

Page 214: Material de Referencia MM

80 17 Yes Yes

A 128 Yes No

GA 12 Yes No

You transfer material between two plants. During the transport process, some parts are damaged so badly that they have to be scrapped. How you can you post this as scrapping? (Choose two.)

A. You reverse the stock removal in the issuing plant and post the scrapping there.

B. You put away the entire quantity in the receiving plant and post the scrapping there.

C. You adjust the stock in transit and put away the remaining quantity in the receiving plant.

you want automatically the system deleted old reservation for which no movement were posted . What is the prerequisiter for this.

A retention period for reservation item must be defied

Good movements for the reservation must be allowed

The reservation must be an automatic reservation.

You want to convert purchase requisitions into follow-on documents as easily as possible. What must have been completed successfully in the purchase requisition before you can do this?

A. Source determination

B. Price determination

C. Message determination

Page 215: Material de Referencia MM

80 47 Yes No

C. Layout

GA 1 Yes No

80 12 Yes No

You want to create a list of all purchase orders for which you have not yet received an invoice. What can you use to find these specific purchase orders when entering your criteria for the search query?

A. Scope of list

B. Selection parameter

You want to create a purchase order for a valuated material. Which views in the material master record must be available as a minimum? (Choose two.)

A. Purchasing

B. Accounting

C. General Plant Data/Storage

You want to post a goods issue from stock in quality inspection. In which of the following cases is this possible? (Choose two.)

A. Withdrawal for scrapping

B. Withdrawal for inspection sample

C. Withdrawal for a reservation

Page 216: Material de Referencia MM

115 84 Yes No

80 6 Yes No

You would like to convert assigned purchase requisitions into follow-on documents. Which of the following statements apply?

You can convert several requisition items from the same vendor to a purchase order. In this case, one requisition item is generated for each PO item

You can convert several requisition items from the same vendor to a purchase order. In doing so, requistion items with the same material are automatically combined for one PO item

If the assigned source was blocked after the assigment was made in the source list, it is not possible to convert the relevant requisition item

Your company manages stock of various advertising articles on a quantity and value basis. In the future, you want to analyze the value of these advertising articles. Unfortunately, the articles have been created with different material types, material groups, valuation classes, and in different number range intervals. For this reason, you want to change the assignments

A. You create a new material group and then change the material group of the advertising articles to the new material group.

B. You create a new material type and then change the material type of the advertising articles to the new material type.

C. You create a new valuation class and then change the valuation class of the advertising articles to the new valuation class.

Page 217: Material de Referencia MM

A 132 Yes No

Yours vendors don´t always send the exact quantities. You therefore allow tolerances for underdeliveries and overdeliveries. Where can you define defauls for this tolerances.

Purcharse value key

material type

user-spefic setting in the good movements transaction MIGO

Page 218: Material de Referencia MM

Answer4 5

Custom clearing 125+

Page 219: Material de Referencia MM

10

1055

Page 220: Material de Referencia MM

D. Procurement type

Vendor Sub range

Purchasing organization

D. Automatically, when purchase requisitions are converted into purchase orders

Page 221: Material de Referencia MM

D. The full confirmed quantity must be entered in one posting in the system.

When creating contracts

Page 222: Material de Referencia MM

the purchase order must be output.

D. A new physical inventory document is created with reference to the original document. The new count quantity is entered in the new physical inventory document and the inventory difference is posted.

Page 223: Material de Referencia MM

consignment services

Maximum percentage value variance for each physical inventory document item

Maximum difference amount for each storage location

A tax code must be specified in the order item

Freight conditions cannot be included in the PO price

Non of the above

D. Project (= WBS element)

E. Work center

D. Create purchase requisition

Page 224: Material de Referencia MM

Contract

D. Purchasing organization

D. Transfer postings between two storage locations of one plant based on a two-step procedure

Non-valuated blocked stock

D. Automatically, when purchase requisitions are converted into purchase orders

Page 225: Material de Referencia MM

D. 50%

Return deliveries with reference to purchase orders must be send to this partner.

Page 226: Material de Referencia MM

D. From the first entry in the Customizing table for terms of payment.

D. Any number

Page 227: Material de Referencia MM

D. The purchase orders with today's date as the delivery date

You receive an invoice in foreign currency and the curren exchange rate is higher than the rate expected

D. The invoice was blocked on the entry date due to date variance. The current date is identical to the delivery date of the order item for which the invoice was blocked.

Page 228: Material de Referencia MM

D. You receive an invoice from a forwarding agent for unplanned delivery costs related to a delivery completed purchase order.

D. The vendor has invoiced a price lower than the purchase order price.

D. Goods receipt to the consignment stock

Purchasing organization

Page 229: Material de Referencia MM

Valuation GroTransaction

A standars purcharse organization must be assigned to the plant to which you post the good receipt.

D. Troubleshooting

Page 230: Material de Referencia MM

Language Direction

System monitoringBusiness process repository

You set the ZERO count indicator.

Page 231: Material de Referencia MM

D. The collective number makes it easier to select documents for generating source list entries from quotations.

D. If a purchase requisition is created, the current moving average price is proposed as the valuation price

Page 232: Material de Referencia MM

Project Kick off, business blueprint, realization final preparation, support

D. One subcontractor

E. Multiple subcontractors

D. The text at item level

D. Labels are printed.

E. The MRP controller receives a message about overdeliveries.

D. The number range for material documents that are generated when postings are made with a movement type

Page 233: Material de Referencia MM

D. Whether there were return deliveries for a purchase order item

E. Whether there is a different invoicing party in the purchase order for this invoice

Tolerances for undeliveries and overdeliveries

that a new message determination process is initiated for a change message.

D. Processing status

D. The name of an item category can be changed in Customizing.

Page 234: Material de Referencia MM

Tolerance limit for quantity changes

Creation´s JIT

D. Current plant stock

E. Date on which the difference is to be posted

D. The interval of the number assignment (internal or external)

E. The sequence of tab pages when a vendor master record is created for vendors in this account group

D. Whether the invoice is blocked for payment when posted

D. The price in the purchase order contains both the service provided by the subcontractor and the value of the components.

E. For subcontracting orders, an invoice receipt is binding.

Page 235: Material de Referencia MM

D. The system deletes the original invoice document.

D. Info record number for external procurement requirements

D. SAP ERP is a technology platform that can be used as a basis for implementing customer-specific enhancements.

D. Set the indicator for invoice receipt.

D. Invoices for blanket purchase orders are always blocked by the system.

Page 236: Material de Referencia MM

D. When the service entry sheet is created only services contained in the purchase order can be entered.

You can configure which kind of stock are taken into account for availability check

You use the availability check in reservation

D. In scheduling agreements

D. In the info record at purchasing organization level

J73
Claudia Rodriguez: Buscar en gestion de stock
Page 237: Material de Referencia MM

is only possible if both materials are managed in the same order unit

The same material type

D. A plant can be assigned to exactly one company code.

D. Multiple purchasing groups can be assigned to a purchasing organization

D. The invoicing plan type for a purchase order item can be changed retroactively.

permissible material

permissible item categories

Item category Consignment

Page 238: Material de Referencia MM

D. Display

Defining the project scope

not all above

plant Quantity

D. Terms of payment

end user training

Manage Change requests

Page 239: Material de Referencia MM

D. Non-valuated goods receipt blocked stock

E. Fixed purchase requisitions

D. The materials being transferred must have the same base unit of measure.

D. SAP Solution Manager is an add-on industry solution.

D. The portal buffers all data so that work can continue in the portal if one of the assigned systems fails.

Page 240: Material de Referencia MM

Plant

The service specification of a service item can be structured in a maximum of four hierarchy levels

You cannot specify just one limit in a service item. A service specification with at least one service must exist

To provide the tools and service to support the operations in all available SAP solution

An initial stock balance entry is an other goods receipt

You can enter a value manually for some of these goods receipts

Credit card settlements

Page 241: Material de Referencia MM

D. Contract release orders

D. Purchase orders

E. Production orders

D. Posting key

D. New account assignment categories can be created in Customizing.

Page 242: Material de Referencia MM

Non of the above

The vendor must be entered inthe BOM as an eligible manufacturer

Inthe purchase order, use item category L

The document type of the requisition determines whether the entire requisition is assigned to a release strategy or whether the release strategies are assigned on an item-wise basisD. Physical inventory status

E. Material status

Page 243: Material de Referencia MM

The portal is a source of information (display function) and is not used for processing data

Planned delivery time

Requirement lead time

The materials being transferred must have the same material group

D. The unplanned delivery costs are to be posted to a specific cost center. Answer: B,C

D. The default valuation class from the user parameters.

Page 244: Material de Referencia MM

D. A different invoice from the vendor

No, a quotation item for which the rejection indicator is set can not be converted into a purchase order

D. Basic Data

E. Forecasting

Page 245: Material de Referencia MM

D. Invoice verification automatically receives a message about the price change made.

A central contract item with category item M (material unknown) for 100 tons of copier paper of material group 4711.

Page 246: Material de Referencia MM

D. In the language defined in the output determination Customizing settings

Document Type.

D. Purchase order item with account assignment, for which a goods receipt is not planned.

Page 247: Material de Referencia MM

75%

Material typo from ROH (raw material) to FERT (finisshed product)

Page 248: Material de Referencia MM

D. MRP controller

The quantity is posted to a special stock for non-stock material.

The quantity booked into GR blocked stocks is recorded in the PO history

Page 249: Material de Referencia MM

D. Price difference account

D. In the invoice header, you have to enter the stock account to which the unplanned delivery costs are to be posted.

Page 250: Material de Referencia MM

D. Create a consignment info record for the relevant material and select the "Regular Vendor" indicator in the record.

Set the aknowlegement required indicator in the vendor master of relevant vendor.

Page 251: Material de Referencia MM

D. Before posting the invoice, you change the payment block indicator in the invoice header to "Released for Payment".

Page 252: Material de Referencia MM

In the consuption values of the material master as consumed quantity

D. Default values in Customizing

Page 253: Material de Referencia MM

D. You put away the entire quantity in the receiving plant, where you immediately carry out a physical inventory of the material.

An available check for the reservation must have been carried out successfully.

D. Partner determination

Page 254: Material de Referencia MM

D. Breakdown

D. Basic Data

D. Withdrawal for a cost center

Page 255: Material de Referencia MM

You can convert SA delivery schedule lines and contract release orders together

D. You create a new number range interval and then change the material numbers of the advertising articles to a number in the new number range interval.

Page 256: Material de Referencia MM

Plans parameter.